Onkyo Av Receiver Tx Nr818 Users Manual

Onkyo-Tx-Nr818-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr818-owner-s-manual

AV Receiver TX-NR818 Manual_TX-NR818_English

TX-NR818 to the manual c3a2c9fb-6e65-4708-8261-f42e3b644448

2015-01-24

: Onkyo Onkyo-Av-Receiver-Tx-Nr818-Users-Manual-233454 onkyo-av-receiver-tx-nr818-users-manual-233454 onkyo pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 156

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Contents
AV RECEIVER

TX-NR818

Safety Information and Introduction ............2

Table of Contents ...........................................6

Connections .................................................13

Turning On & Basic Operations..................23

Instruction Manual

Advanced Operations ..................................51

Controlling Other Components...................82

Appendix .......................................................91

Internet Radio Guide
Remote Control Codes

Safety Information and Introduction

WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.

CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING

AVIS

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.

Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand,
PORTABLE CART WARNING
tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer,
or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to
S3125A
avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or water,

En-2

D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician to
restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage
points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or
electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and follow
local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is
adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides and
10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf or
board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4") away
from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like gap for
warm air to escape.

Safety Information and Introduction

Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without
the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not userserviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact your
Onkyo dealer.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all over
with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth
dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and
water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a
clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners,
alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because they may
damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION
CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make
sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage
requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel (e.g., AC
230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug is
readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.

5. Preventing Hearing Loss
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or the
like.
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands are
wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets inside
this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo dealer.
8. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally
bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for a
long time, because they may leave marks on the
case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm after
prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may not
work properly the next time you turn it on, so be sure
to use it occasionally.

For models with [POWER] button, or with both
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF mode
does not fully disconnect from the mains. If you do not
intend to use the unit for an extended period, remove
the power cord from the AC outlet.
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an
extended period, remove the power cord from the AC
outlet.

En-3

For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.

Safety Information and Introduction

For Canadian Models

IMPORTANT

NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS

The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse needs
to be replaced, the replacement fuse must approved by
ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rating
as that indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA mark or
the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable fuse
in the plug.

COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.

Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE LA
CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-003
DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.

For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.

For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We, ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
K. MIYAGI

ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured
red.

En-4

Safety Information and Introduction

Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:
Indoor FM antenna (➔ page 22)

■ Aiming the remote controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor, as shown below.
Remote control sensor

AM loop antenna (➔ page 22)

AV receiver

Power cord (➔ page 22)
Speaker cable labels (➔ page 15)
Speaker setup microphone (➔ page 38)
Remote controller (RC-840M) and two batteries (AA/R6)
(Note for China: The battery for the remote controller is not
supplied for this unit.)

Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)

Quick Start Guide
*

In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the
same regardless of color.

■ Installing the batteries

Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will
enable you to obtain optimum performance and
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.

Batteries (AA/R6)
Note
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing the
batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage
from leakage or corrosion.

En-5

Safety Information and Introduction

Table of Contents
Safety Information and Introduction
Important Safety Instructions ......................................2
Precautions ...................................................................3
Supplied Accessories...................................................5
Table of Contents..........................................................6
Features .........................................................................7
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8
Remote Controller.......................................................12

Connections
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................13
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................13
About AV Connections ..............................................18
Connecting Components with HDMI .........................19
Connecting Your Components ..................................20
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................21
Connecting the Antennas..........................................22
Connecting the Power Cord ......................................22

Turning On & Basic Operations
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver ................................23
Turning On ................................................................23
Turning Off ................................................................23
Initial Setup..................................................................24
Selecting the Language
for the Onscreen Setup Menus...............................24
Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup ........................24
Source Connection....................................................25
Remote Mode Setup .................................................25
Network Connection..................................................25
Terminating the Initial Setup .....................................25

Playback ...................................................................... 26
Playing the Connected Component .......................... 26
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices..... 27
Understanding Icons on the Display ......................... 28
Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB............................... 28
Playing a USB Device............................................... 29
Listening to vTuner Internet Radio............................ 29
Registering Other Internet Radio .............................. 30
Changing the Icon Layout
on the Network Service Screen.............................. 31
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) .................. 31
Remote Playback...................................................... 32
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ................... 33
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................ 34
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources..... 36
Using Basic Functions............................................... 37
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup......................... 37
Using the Listening Modes ....................................... 40
Using the Home Menu .............................................. 47
Using the Sleep Timer .............................................. 48
Setting the Display Brightness.................................. 48
Displaying Source Information.................................. 48
Changing the Input Display....................................... 48
Using the Whole House Mode .................................. 49
Selecting Speaker Layout......................................... 49
Muting the AV Receiver ............................................ 49
Using Headphones ................................................... 49
Using Easy Macros................................................... 50

Advanced Operations
On-screen Setup......................................................... 51
Using the Quick Setup .............................................. 51
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup.................. 52
Using the Setup Menu (HOME) ................................ 55
About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator ................... 56
Setup Menu Items..................................................... 56
Input/Output Assign .................................................. 57
Speaker Setup .......................................................... 59
Audio Adjust.............................................................. 64
Source Setup ............................................................ 67
Listening Mode Preset .............................................. 72
Miscellaneous ........................................................... 73
Hardware Setup........................................................ 74
Remote Controller Setup .......................................... 77
Lock Setup................................................................ 77

En-6

Multi Zone ................................................................... 78
Making Multi Zone Connections ............................... 78
Controlling Multi Zone Components ......................... 79
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone and Multiroom Control Kits ........................... 81

Controlling Other Components
iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock .................... 82
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 82
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 83
Controlling Other Components................................. 84
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes .................. 84
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 84
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 85
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 85
Remote Control Codes
for Onkyo Components Connected via RI ............. 86
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons ................... 86
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 86
Controlling Other Components ................................. 86
Learning Commands ................................................ 89
Using Normal Macros ............................................... 90

Appendix
Troubleshooting ......................................................... 91
Firmware Update ........................................................ 97
Connection Tips and Video Signal Path ................ 101
Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player,
or Recorder ............................................................ 104
About HDMI............................................................... 106
Network/USB Features............................................. 107
License and Trademark Information ...................... 110
Specifications ........................................................... 111

To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY (➔ page 91).

Safety Information and Introduction

Features
Amplifier
• 135 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 180 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 230 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High
Power Transformer
• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design

Processing
• THX Select2 Plus Certified
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)
• HQV®-Vida Video Processing with 1080p Video
upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital
Plus, DSD and Multi-CH PCM)
• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX®
• DTS Neo:X
• Non-Scaling Configuration
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
• Direct Mode
• Pure Audio Mode
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing DSP
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology
• Digital Processing Crossover Network

Connections

Miscellaneous

• 8 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs
• Onkyo p for System Control
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial)
• Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts

• 40 FM/AM Presets
• Dolby Volume
• Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to correct room acoustic
problems
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ® for loudness correction
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume® to maintain optimal
listening level and dynamic range
• Crossover Adjustment
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)
• Auto Standby Function
• On-Screen Display via HDMI
• Preprogrammed (with onscreen display setup)
RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities and
Mode-Key LEDs
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration

In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio
amplifier is prohibited.

• Powered Zone 2/3
• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with FHL/FHR
• Analog RGB Video Input (D-sub 15) for PC
• Internet Radio Connectivity
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• 2 USB Inputs (Front/Rear) for Memory Devices and
iPod®/iPhone® models (Enables Display of Album
Artwork)
*

Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with
iPod/iPhone.

• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input

En-7

Safety Information and Introduction

Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel

d e

(North American models)

(European, Australian and Asian models)

lm n opq

u v w

y
En-8

Safety Information and Introduction
The AV receiver has various logos printed on it. They are
not shown here for clarity.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a 8ON/STANDBY button (23)
b Remote control sensor (5)
c Display (10)

i PHONES jack (49)
j ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (79)
k TONE and Tone Level buttons (52)
l MONITOR OUT button (57)
m DISPLAY button (48)

d MASTER VOLUME control and indicator (26)

n TUNING q/w (34), PRESET e/r (34), cursor and
enter (middle) buttons

e HYBRID STANDBY indicator (56)

o DIMMER button (North American models) (48)

f PURE AUDIO button and indicator (40)

p MEMORY button (34)

g Input selector buttons (26)

q TUNING MODE button (34)

h Front flap
Gently push on the lower end of the front panel to open
the flap.

r LISTENING MODE buttons (40)
s WHOLE HOUSE MODE button (49)
t SETUP MIC jack (38)
u SETUP button (55)
v HOME button (47, 55)
w RETURN button
x USB port (20)
y AUX INPUT jacks (19, 20)
z RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and
Asian models) (35)

En-9

Safety Information and Introduction

Display
s

b cd e f

k l

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a Speaker/channel indicators

c Z3 (Zone 3) indicator (79)

i Input indicators (102)
HDMI indicator (75)
DIGITAL indicator
ANALOG indicator

d Listening mode and format indicators (40)

j Bi AMP indicator

e M.Opt indicator (53)

k Audyssey indicator (37, 67)
Dynamic EQ indicator (67)

b Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (79)

f 1, 3 and cursor indicators (28)
g NET indicator (29 to 33, 77)
h Tuning indicators
RDS indicator (excluding North American models)
(35)
AUTO indicator (34)
TUNED indicator (34)
FM STEREO indicator (34)

- (Dolby) Vol indicator
Dynamic Vol indicator (68)
l Headphone indicator (49)
m Message area
n MUTING indicator (49)
o Volume level
p USB indicator (28, 29)
q SLEEP indicator (48)

En-10

p q

Safety Information and Introduction

Rear Panel

b cd

g h i j

p q

k l

a u REMOTE CONTROL jack

i ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks

r SB/FH/FW EXT AMP* jacks

b USB port

j ZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks

c ETHERNET port

k FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal

d RS232 port
Terminal for control.

l PC IN jack

s Speaker Terminals
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R,
SURR BACK L/R, FRONT HIGH/ZONE 3 L/R and
FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R)

e Composite video and analog audio jacks
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME 1
IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN and PHONO IN)

n DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks

f HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) jacks
g COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT
jacks

m AC INLET

See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection
(➔ pages 13 to 22).

o GND screw
p MONITOR OUT V jack
q PRE OUT jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SB/FH/FW*,
SUBWOOFER)

h IR IN and OUT jacks

En-11

SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide

Safety Information and Introduction

Remote Controller
Controlling the AV Receiver

a
b

i
c

To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to select
Receiver mode.
You can also use the remote controller to control
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and
other components.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more
details (➔ page 85).
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a 8 RECEIVER button (23)

■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or
RECEIVER).
You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER repeatedly.
a q/w buttons (34)
b D.TUN button (34)
c DISPLAY button
d CH +/– button (35)
e Number buttons (34)

b ACTIVITIES buttons (50)
*2

d
e
a
f

k
d

c REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons (26)
d SP (speaker layout) button (49)
e q/w/e/r and ENTER buttons
f Q SETUP button (51)
g Listening Mode buttons (40)
h DIMMER button (48)

l
m

i DISPLAY button (48)
j MUTING button (49)
k VOL q/w button (26)
l RETURN button
m HOME button (47)

n SLEEP button (48)

e
h
b

En-12

When you want to change the remote controller mode (target
component) without changing the current input source, press
MODE and within about 8 seconds, press REMOTE MODE.
Then, using the same AV receiver’s remote controller, you can
control the component corresponding to the button you
pressed.
These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE MODE
other than Receiver mode is selected.

Connections

Connecting the AV
Receiver

Connecting the Speaker Cables
The following illustration shows how to connect the
speakers to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one
surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L
terminals.

Connecting Your Speakers

Tip

Speaker Configuration
The following table indicates the channels you should use
depending on the number of speakers that you have.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid
bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system, you need
to set the speaker settings automatically (➔ page 37) or
manually (➔ page 60).
Number of
speakers

• You can specify whether surround back, front high, or front wide
speakers are connected in the “Speaker Configuration” menu
(➔ page 60) or during Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup (➔ page 37).

■ Screw-type speaker terminals
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the ends
of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as
shown.
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)

2 3 4 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 11

Front speakers ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Center speaker
Surround
speakers
Surround back
speaker*1*2
Surround back
speakers*2
Front high
speakers*2
Front wide
speakers*2
*1
*2

✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔

✔ ✔
✔

✔
✔ ✔

✔

✔
✔

✔

■ Banana Plugs (North American models)
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker
terminal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center
hole of the speaker terminal.

✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front high, surround back and front wide speakers cannot be
used at the same time.

En-13

Connections
■ 7.1-channel playback
Select the speakers (surround back, front high, front wide) you want to use for 7.1-channel playback.
You can set which speakers you want to use by priority. See “Selecting Speaker Layout” (➔ page 49).

Front high
right

Front wide
right

Front right

Front left

Front wide
left

Front high
left

Center

■ 9.1-channel playback
By adding an external amplifier to the 7.1-channel
configuration shown on the left, you can enjoy 9.1-channel
playback.
Connect your power amplifier’s analog audio input jacks to
the AV receiver’s SB/FH/FW EXT AMP*1 jacks with
audio cables. To use the SB/FH/FW EXT AMP jacks, you
must specify their channel with the “Preout to External
Amplifier” setting (➔ page 59).
You can set which speakers you want to use by priority.
See “Selecting Speaker Layout” (➔ page 49).
*1

SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide

Power amplifier
Surround
right

Surround
back right

Surround
back left

Surround
left
Surround back right/
Front high right/
Front wide right

En-14

Surround back left/
Front high left/
Front wide left

Connections

Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels

Speaker Connection Precautions

The speaker terminals are color-coded for identification
purpose.

Read the following before connecting your speakers:
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of between
4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the connected
speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less than 6 ohms, be sure
to set the minimum speaker impedance to “4ohms”
(➔ page 59). If you use speakers with a lower
impedance, and use the amplifier at high volume levels
for a long period of time, the built-in protection circuit
may be activated.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other
words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)
terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–)
terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so may
damage the AV receiver.

Speaker

Color

Front left, Front high left, Front wide left,
Zone 2 left, Zone 3 left

White

Front right, Front high right, Front wide
right, Zone 2 right, Zone 3 right

Red

Center

Green

Surround left

Blue

Surround right

Gray

Surround back left

Brown

Surround back right

Tan

The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-coded and
you should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the table above. Then all
you need to do is to match the color of each label to the
corresponding speaker terminal.

En-15

• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.

Connections

Using Dipole Speakers

Using Powered Subwoofers

Bi-amping the Front Speakers
Important:

TV/screen

LINE INPUT

• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove
the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter (high) and
woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support biamping. Refer to your speaker manual.

Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble performance.
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.
Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections as
shown and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the
speaker setting to enable bi-amping (➔ page 59).

Powered subwoofer

You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround
back speakers. Dipole speakers output the same sound in
two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround
dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the surround
back dipole speakers (b) should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward each other, as shown.

Corner
position

1/3 of wall
position

To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing
a movie or some music with good bass, experiment by
placing your subwoofer at various positions within the
room, and choose the one that provides the most satisfying
results.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
The same signal is output from each jack.
Tip
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an external
amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an input on the
amplifier.

En-16

Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)

Front right

Front left

Connections

Connecting a Power Amplifier

Using Speakers Without Crossover Network

If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier, you
can use the AV receiver as a preamp. Connect all speaker
outputs to the power amplifier. See the manuals supplied
with your amplifier for details.
*1

Important:
• Speakers without crossover network are speakers with no
built-in crossover network.
• With speakers without crossover network, be careful NOT to
connect tweeters and woofers the wrong way around, as this
may damage your speakers.
• With speakers without crossover network, be careful not to set
“Speaker Type (Front)” to “Bi-Amp” as this may damage
your speakers. Make sure that this setting is set to “Digital
Crossover”.
• Confirm that your speakers are without crossover network by
referring to your speaker manual.

Power amplifier
SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide
Note
*1
*2

Specify “None” for any channel that you don’t want to output
(➔ page 60).
When connecting to the SB/FH/FW EXT AMP jacks, you
must set the “Preout to External Amplifier” setting
(➔ page 59).

Note
• You need to make the setting before connecting the speakers.

Connecting speakers without crossover network provide a
fine, three-dimensional sound field that extends bass and
treble performance to the fullest extent. When speakers
without crossover network are used, the AV receiver is
able to drive up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.
You must enable “Digital Crossover” in “Speaker Type
(Front)” (➔ page 59) and make the settings of “Digital
Processing Crossover Network” (➔ page 63).

Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)

Front right

Front left

En-17

Connections

About AV Connections
Connecting AV components
a

HDMI cable

: Video & Audio

TV, projector, etc.
*1

• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections
can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio
and video cables away from power
cords and speaker cables.

Right!

■ Optical digital audio
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM*2, Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio
quality is the same as coaxial.

Wrong!

AV Cables and Jacks
AV receiver

■ HDMI
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.

■ Coaxial digital audio
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM*2, Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio
quality is the same as optical.
Orange

Blu-ray Disc/
DVD player

Other cables

Game console

: Audio

: Video

TV, projector, etc.

■ Component video
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and color
difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best picture
quality (some TV manufacturers label their component
video sockets slightly differently).

■ Analog audio (RCA)
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
White
Red

AV receiver

Blu-ray Disc/
DVD player
*1

Game console

If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return Channel (ARC), you
need to connect an optical digital cable together with the
HDMI cable to the AV receiver.

• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed and
double-checked all AV connections.

Green

Blue

Red

■ Analog RGB
This is a conventional analog interface to connect a PC and
a display device (also called D-Sub or D-subminiature).

For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4 and
192 kHz are also supported.

Note
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type covers
that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it’s
removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Caution

■ Composite video
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs, and
other video equipment.
Yellow

En-18

• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight
when inserting and removing.

Connections

Connecting Components with HDMI
Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.

Personal computer
TV, projector, etc.
Camcorder, etc.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
Game console
Set top box/digital video recorder, etc.
*

If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return Channel (ARC), you
need to connect an optical digital cable together with the HDMI
cable to the AV receiver.
When listening to an HDMI component through the AV
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen
on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI
component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV power is off
or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no
sound from the AV receiver or the sound may be cut off.

Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The
default input assignments are shown below.
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ page 58).
Jack

Components

IN1

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player

✔

IN2

Satellite/cable set-top box, etc.

✔

IN3

Set top box/digital video recorder, etc.

✔

IN4

Game console

✔

IN5

Game console

✔

IN6

Personal computer

✔

IN7

Other components

✔

Front

Camcorder, etc.

OUT MAIN

OUT SUB

Projector, etc.

See also:
• “Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” (➔ page 101)
• “Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder”
(➔ page 104)
• “About HDMI” (➔ page 106)

En-19

Tip
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”
(➔ page 75) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.
Note
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is output
despite following the above-mentioned procedure, set your Bluray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to PCM.

■ Audio Return Channel (ARC) function
The Audio Return Channel (ARC) function enables an
HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT
MAIN on the AV receiver.
• This function can be used when:
– Your TV is ARC capable, and
– The TV/CD input selector is selected, and
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”(➔ page 75), and
– “Audio Return Channel” is set to “Auto” (➔ page 76).

■ MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),
the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver highdefinition video from a connected mobile device.

Connections

Connecting Your Components
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is connected to other
video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display when changing settings.

Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The
default input assignments are shown below. See
“Connection Tips and Video Signal Path” for more
information (➔ page 101).
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ page 58).
No. Jack/Port

Front

Components

USB*1*2

iPod/iPhone, MP3 player,
USB flash drive

USB, AUX INPUT
VIDEO*3

iPod/iPhone (video
playback)

AUX INPUT
VIDEO

Camcorder, etc

AUDIO L/R
DIGITAL
D

COAXIAL 1 (BD/DVD) Blu-ray Disc/DVD player

✔

COAXIAL 2 (CBL/SAT) Satellite/cable set-top box,
etc.

✔

COAXIAL 3 (STB/DVR) Set top box/digital video
recorder, etc

✔

OPTICAL 1 (GAME 1)

Game consoles

✔

OPTICAL 2 (TV/CD)

TV, CD player

✔

ETHERNET

Router

MONITOR OUT

TV, projector, etc.

Rear

A E

DIGITAL IN

BD/DVD IN

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player

CBL/SAT IN

Satellite/cable set-top box,
etc.

STB/DVR IN

Set top box/digital video
recorder, etc

GAME 1 IN

Game console, RI dock

PC IN

Personal computer

TV/CD IN

TV, CD player, cassette
tape deck, MD, CD-R,
Turntable*4, RI dock

PHONO IN

Turntable*4

GND screw

To be continued

En-20

Connections
No. Jack/Port
G

• With connection F, if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
has both the main stereo and multichannel outputs, be
sure to connect the main stereo.

Components

COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT

TV, projector, etc.

IN 1 (BD/DVD)

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player,
RI dock

✔

IN 2 (CBL/SAT)

Satellite/cable set-top box,
RI dock, etc.

✔

PC IN*5

Personal computer

Connecting Onkyo RI Components

Note
*1

*2
*3

Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB port on
your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played
through the AV receiver in this way.
Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with
iPod/iPhone.
When the USB input is selected, you can input video signals
from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack. Video signals input from
AUX INPUT VIDEO will be output from the MONITOR
OUT V and HDMI output jacks.
Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp to
TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono
preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a
phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable has
a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a commercially
available MC head amp or MC transformer to connect to
PHONO IN. See your turntable’s manual for details.
If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV
receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the
ground wire may produce an audible hum. If this happens,
disconnect it.
When you connect your personal computer to PC IN and select
the PC input selector, the video of the personal computer is
output from the HDMI outputs. However, if you have assigned
the HDMI inputs to the PC input selector, the AV receiver will
output signals received from the HDMI inputs instead of
signals from PC IN. To have the signals output from PC IN,
select “- - - - -” for “PC” in the “HDMI Input” setting
(➔ page 58).

Make sure that each Onkyo component is
connected with an analog audio cable (connection
F in the hookup examples) (➔ page 20).

2
3

Make the u connection (see the illustration).
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape deck,
change the Input Display (➔ page 48).
e.g., cassette tape deck

R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the following
special functions:
■ System On/Auto Power On
When you start playback on a component connected via
u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV
receiver will automatically turn on and select that
component as the input source.
■ Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via
u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source.
■ Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor instead of the component. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first
(➔ page 86).

• With connection D, you can enjoy Dolby Digital and
DTS. (To listen in Zone 2/3 as well, use D and F.)
• With connection F, you can enjoy audio from external
components while you are in Zone 2/3.

En-21

R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

RI Dock
Note
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables are supplied
with Onkyo components.
• Some components have two u jacks. You can connect either
one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for connecting
additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Connecting other
manufacturer’s components may cause a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all u functions. Refer to the
manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and Direct
Change u functions do not work.

Connections

Connecting the Antennas

Connecting the Power Cord

This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna to use
the tuner.
North American models

Connect the supplied power cord to the AV
receiver’s AC INLET.

European, Australian
and Asian models
To AC wall outlet

Push.

Insert wire.

Release.

Insert the plug fully
into the jack.

2
Assembling the AM loop antenna

Caution

• Be careful not to injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
Thumbtacks, etc.

AM loop antenna (supplied)

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

Indoor FM antenna (supplied)

Note
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible
reception.
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
Tip
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM
antenna.

En-22

Note
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your
speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge
that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same
circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different
branch circuit.
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV
receiver. The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for use
with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other
equipment.
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the
other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing so may cause
an electric shock. Always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet first, and then the AV receiver.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Turning On/Off the AV
Receiver

Turning On

8ON/STANDBY

Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the
remote controller.
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.

Turning Off

Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on the
remote controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver,
always turn down the volume before you turn it off.

Tip
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on the
status of settings (➔ page 56).
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto Standby”
(➔ page 76).

■ Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
(Initial Setup)
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps to
help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for
the very first time. These settings only need to be made
once. See “Initial Setup” for details (➔ page 24).
■ If the “Firmware Update Available” window
appears.
When a new version of the firmware is available, the
notification window “Firmware Update Available”
pops up. This notification only appears when the AV
receiver is connected to your home network
(➔ page 107). To perform the firmware update, follow
the instructions on screen.
Use q/w and ENTER on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the options.
`Update Now:
Starts the firmware update.
Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔ page 97).
`Remind me Later:
The update notification will pop up again the next
time you turn the AV receiver on.
`Never Remind me:
Disables the automatic update notification.
Tip

8RECEIVER

• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled in
“Update Notice” (➔ page 77).

RECEIVER

En-23

Turning On & Basic Operations

Initial Setup
This section explains the settings that we recommend you
to make before using the AV receiver for the very first
time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time use to let
you perform those settings.

Selecting the Language for the
Onscreen Setup Menus
This step determines the language used for the onscreen
setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD Setup”
(➔ page 74).
Tip

The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.

• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the initial
setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu
(➔ page 77).

After selecting the language for on-screen setup menus, a
welcome screen is displayed.
Initial Setup
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?
Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.
Now, would you like to start initial setup?
1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
2nd Step : Source Connection
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup
4th Step : Network Connection
Yes
No
HOME Exit

Use q/w on the AV receiver or remote controller to
select one of the following options, and then press
ENTER.
` Yes:
Continues to “Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto
Setup”.
` No:
Skips the settings and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the
Initial Setup” (➔ page 25). You can always
restart the initial setup by selecting “Initial
Setup” in the “Hardware Setup” menu
(➔ page 77).

En-24

Audyssey MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.

Use q/w to select one of the following options, and
then press ENTER.
` Do it Now:
The automatic speaker setup is performed
following instructions on screen. Refer to step 2
of “Using the Automatic Speaker Setup”
(➔ page 37). When this setting is complete, the
setup wizard continues to “Source Connection”.
` Do it Later:
Skips this setting.
Press ENTER and continue to “Source
Connection”.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Source Connection
This step checks the connection of source components.

2
3

Use q/w to select one of the following options, and
then press ENTER.
`Yes, Continue:
Performs the checkings.
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Remote Mode
Setup”.
Select the input selector for which you want to
check the connection and press ENTER.
The picture of the corresponding source should appear
on screen with a verification prompt.

Remote Mode Setup
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for the
components you want to operate.

When prompted, use q/w to select one of the
following options and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Confirms that the source is properly displayed.
`No:
Displays an error report. Follow the
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the
source.
Use q/w to select one of the following options, and
then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Returns to step 2.
`No, Done Checking:
The setup wizard continues to “Remote Mode
Setup”.

Use q/w to select one of the following options, and
then press ENTER.
` Yes:
Performs the remote control code input. Refer to
step 5 of “Looking up for Remote Control
Codes” (➔ page 84).
` No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Network
Connection”.

Follow the instructions on screen to perform the
network checking.
The checking is complete when the message
“Successfully connected.” appears at the middle of
the screen. Press ENTER to terminate the initial
setup.
Tip
• If you have selected “Wireless (Option)”, you need to
configure the optional wireless adapter. For further details,
see the instruction manual provided with the wireless
adapter (UWF-1).

When you’re finished, select one of the following
options and press ENTER.
` Yes, Done:
The setup wizard continues to “Network
Connection”.
` No, not yet:
You can enter other remote control codes.

If an error message appears, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
` Retry:
Performs the checking again.
` No, Do it Later:
Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.
The setup wizard goes to “Terminating the
Initial Setup”.

Terminating the Initial Setup
Network Connection
This step checks your network connection.

Use q/w to select one of the following options, and
then press ENTER.
` Yes:
Performs the checkings.
` No, Skip:
Skips this step and terminates the initial setup.

En-25

This step ends the initial setup process.

Press ENTER.
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in
the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 77).

Turning On & Basic Operations

Playback

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.
This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller, unless otherwise specified.

Playing the Connected Component
■ Operating with the remote controller

INPUT SELECTOR

RECEIVER
VOL q/w

3
4

Start playback on the source component.
See also:
• “Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB” (➔ page 28)
• “Playing a USB Device” (➔ page 29)
• “Listening to vTuner Internet Radio” (➔ page 29)
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔ page 30)
• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”
(➔ page 31)
• “Remote Playback” (➔ page 32)
• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”
(➔ page 33)
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔ page 34)
• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”
(➔ page 36)
• “iPod/iPhone Playback via Onkyo Dock”
(➔ page 82)
• “Controlling Other Components” (➔ page 84)
To adjust the volume, use VOL q/w.
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See also:
• “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ page 40)
• “Sound Program Edit” (➔ page 66)

■ Operating on the AV receiver
Input selector buttons

MASTER VOLUME

LISTENING MODE

Use the input selector buttons to select the input
source.

2
3

Start playback on the source component.

Select a listening mode and enjoy!

To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME
control.

■ Screen Saver
If there is no video signal on the current input source and
no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.
Tip
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed
in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 74).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is
operated.

Listening mode buttons

Press RECEIVER followed by an INPUT
SELECTOR button.

En-26

Turning On & Basic Operations

Controlling Contents of USB or
Network Devices
Press USB or NET first.

a TOP MENU
This button displays the top menu for each media or service.

n 2
This button stops playback.

b q/w and ENTER
These buttons navigate through the menus.

o MODE
You can switch between Standard Mode and Extended
Mode.

e/r
This button cycles through pages.

PLAYLIST e/r
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects
playlists.
c 1
This button starts playback.

i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q

d 7
This button selects the beginning of the current song.
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.
e 5
This button fast-reverses the current song.
f 3
This button pauses playback.
g SEARCH
You can toggle between the playback screen and the list
screen during playback.
h DISPLAY
This button switches between song information during
playback.
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to return to
the playback screen.
i ALBUM +/–
In Standard Mode (iPod/iPhone), this button selects albums.
j MENU
This button displays the menu of Internet radio services.
k RETURN
This button returns to the previous menu.
l 6
This button selects the next song.
m 4
This button fast-forwards the current song.

En-27

p RANDOM
This button performs random playback.
q REPEAT
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat
modes.
Tip
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of
other components (➔ page 84).
Note
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the devices and
media used for playback.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Understanding Icons on the Display
This section describes icons that appear on the AV
receiver’s display during media playback.
Icon

Playing an iPod/iPhone via USB

Press MODE repeatedly to switch to Extended
Mode (Music) or Extended Mode (Video).

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs.

A list of your iPod/iPhone model’s contents appears.

Pause

This section explains how to play music/video files on the
iPod/iPhone.
Compatible iPod/iPhone models
Made for:
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation), iPod classic,
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th generation),
iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

• If you want to operate using the iPod/iPhone or the remote
controller, press MODE repeatedly to switch to Standard
mode.
• When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV receiver
remembers the current mode. This means that if you
disconnect when in Extended Mode (Music), the AV
receiver will start in Extended Mode (Music) the next time
you connect the iPod/iPhone.

Fast Forward

Tip

Description
Folder
Track
Playback

Fast Reverse

Repeat One Track
Repeat Folder (USB Device)
Repeat
Shuffle
Shuffle Album (iPod/iPhone)

• You can also use the q/w, enter (middle) and TUNING
MODE buttons on the front panel. TUNING MODE allows
you to switch modes.

• The same operation can be done by selecting “USB” in the
Home menu.

Connect the USB cable that comes with the
iPod/iPhone to the USB port on the front of the AV
receiver.
While reading the contents of your iPod/iPhone, the
message “Connecting...” appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the iPod/iPhone.
Tip
• When connecting your iPod/iPhone with a USB cable, we
recommend you use an official USB cable from Apple Inc.

En-28

Use q/w to select a folder, and then press ENTER to
open it.
Tip

Tip

Artist
Album

Press USB repeatedly to select the “USB(Front)”
input.

Use q/w to select a music/video file, and press
ENTER or 1 to start playback.

Note
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your
iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port, no sound will
be output from the headphones jack.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Extended Mode (Music) Control
The music content information is displayed (lists are
displayed), and you can control the music content while
looking at the screen.
Top screen list:
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Shuffle Songs, Now Playing.
Note

Playing a USB Device

Listening to vTuner Internet Radio

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs.

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 107). The on-screen information
appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI
outputs.

This section explains how to play music files from a USB
device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).
See also:
• “Network/USB Features” (➔ page 107).

• In this mode, video contents are not displayed, even if they are
input from the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s
front panel.

Press USB repeatedly to select the “USB(Front)” or
“USB(Rear)” input.

Extended Mode (Video) control

The video content information is displayed (lists are
displayed), and you can control the video content while
looking at the screen.
Top screen list:
Movies, Music Videos, TV Shows, Video Podcasts,
Rentals.

Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the USB device.

Press ENTER.
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a
folder, use q/w to select it, and then press ENTER.

Use q/w to select a music file, and press ENTER or
1 to start playback.

Note
• To view the video contents of your iPod/iPhone, connect it to the
USB port and AUX INPUT VIDEO jack on the AV receiver’s
front panel, using the official Apple Composite AV Cable.
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation, the
displayed items may vary and the support for Extended Mode
(Video) is not guaranteed.

Note
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, do not disconnect the USB cable supplied with your
iPod/iPhone or the USB device from the USB port.

The vTuner Internet Radio Service is a portal site featuring
radio stations from all over the world.
You can search for stations by categories such as genre or
location. The AV receiver is preinstalled with this service.

Press NET.
The network service screen appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.

Use q/w/e/r to select “vTuner Internet Radio”
and then press ENTER.

Use q/w to select a program and then press
ENTER.
Playback starts.

Standard Mode Control
The content information is not displayed, but can be
operated using the iPod/iPhone or the remote controller.

My Music
0 : 11
Great Artist
My Favorite

Tip
• You can find stations similar to the one being played.
During playback, press MENU on the remote controller,
select “Stations like this” and press ENTER.

En-29

Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Adding vTuner Internet Radio Stations to
Favorites
There are two ways you can register specific Internet
radio stations (programs) from the vTuner Internet
Radio.
Adding to My Favorites
The selected program will be added to “My Favorites”
on the network service screen, which appears when
pressing NET on the remote controller.
1. Press MENU with the station selected or while a
station is playing.
2. Use q/w to select “Add to My Favorites”, and press
ENTER.
3. Use q/w/e/r to select “OK”, and press ENTER.
Tip
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”.

Adding to vTuner Internet Radio’s Favorites
Select “vTuner Internet Radio” and press ENTER to
display the “Favorites” folder that appears on the same
screen as “Stations By Genre”, “Stations By
Location”, etc. This is where your favorite Internet radio
bookmarks will be stored.
To register your favorite stations using a personal
computer, you need to connect your PC to the same
network as the AV receiver. Enter the ID# (MAC
address) of your unit on http://onkyo.vtuner.com/. You
can then register your favorite radio programs. The ID#
is shown at the bottom of the “vTuner Internet Radio”
top menu, and the AV receiver’s MAC address is shown
on “Network” of the Setup menu (➔ page 76).

Registering Other Internet Radio
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 107). The on-screen information
appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI
outputs.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by the
Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to some
stations.
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must register
your station in “My Favorites” of the network service
screen, as described below.
Note
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See the
separate instructions for more information.

Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify your
IP address (➔ page 77).
Take a note of the IP address.

2
3

On your computer, start your web browser.

Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the
Internet radio station’s name and URL.

Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the browser’s
Internet address (URL) field.
If you are using Internet Explorer®, you can also enter
the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File” menu.
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on your
Internet browser (Web Setup).

En-30

Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.
The Internet radio station is then added to “My
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press NET,
and then select “My Favorites” on the network
service screen. A list of registered Internet radio
stations appears. Select the one that you saved and
press ENTER.

Tip
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My Favorites”,
select an empty slot in the list and press MENU. Then, select
“Create New Station” and press ENTER.
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen. Use that
keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL respectively, and
then press ENTER.
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”, press
MENU with the station selected or while the station is playing.
Then, use q/w to select “Delete from My Favorites” and press
ENTER. You can also delete stations from the Web Setup.
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station and
press MENU. Then, use q/w to select “Rename this station” and
press ENTER.
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Changing the Icon Layout on the
Network Service Screen
You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output
(HDMI OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen
setting.
The layout of icons can be customized by switching their
positions on the network service screen.

Press NET.
The network service screen appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.

Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)

1
2

Start your computer or media server.

• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.

3
4

Note
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3 may not
work.
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,
check your server, network, and AV receiver connections.

Press NET.
The network service screen appears. The NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network
connection.
Tip

Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.

Use q/w/e/r to select another icon as the
destination, and then press ENTER.
The icons switch positions and the message
“Completed!” appears.

My favorite song 1
0 : 11
Artist name
My favorite album

This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or media server through the AV receiver (Server
Playback).

Tip

Use q/w/e/r to select an icon to move, and then
press ENTER.

Use q/w to select an item, and then press ENTER or
1 to start playback.

You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 107). The on-screen information
appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI
outputs.

• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.

2
3

Use q/w/e/r to select “DLNA”, and press ENTER.
Use q/w to select a server, and then press ENTER.
The menu is displayed according to the server
functions.
Note
• The search function does not work with media servers
which do not support this function.
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot be
accessed from the AV receiver.
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server, the
AV receiver may not able to access the content. See the
instruction manual of the media server.

Windows Media Player 11 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.

1
2

Start Windows Media Player 11.

Select the “Share my media” check box, and then
click “OK”.
A list of the supported devices appears.

Select the AV receiver in the list, and then click
“Allow”.
The corresponding icon will be checked.

On the “Library” menu, select “Media Sharing”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.

To be continued

En-31

Turning On & Basic Operations

Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Windows
Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver.

Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.

On the “Media streaming options”, select the AV
receiver and confirm that it is set to “Allow”.

Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Windows
Media Player 12 library.

Tip
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from
the Microsoft web site.

Remote Playback
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 107). The on-screen information
appears only on a TV that is connected to HDMI
outputs.
Remote Playback means you can play the music files
stored on a media server or personal computer with the AV
receiver by operating the controller device in the home
network.

Tip
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote control
of my Player...” is checked.

Using Remote Playback

1
2

Turn on the AV receiver.

On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a
music file.
The right-click menu appears.

Windows Media Player 12 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your personal computer.

1
2

Start Windows Media Player 12.
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Tip
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.

Start Windows Media Player 12.
To enable remote playback, you must first configure
Windows Media Player 12.

Tip
• For selecting another media server, select the desired media
server from the “Other Libraries” menu on Windows Media
Player 12.

Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.
The “Play to” window appears and playback on the
AV receiver starts. Operations during remote playback
can be made from the “Play to” window of Windows 7
on your personal computer.
A playback screen will be displayed on the connected
TV.

En-32

Adjusting the Volume.
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the volume
bar in the “Remote playback” window. The default
maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If you wish to
change this, enter the value from the Web Setup in
your browser. Refer to step 3 of “Registering Other
Internet Radio” for details (➔ page 30).
The volume value of the remote window and the
volume value of the AV receiver may not always
match.
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote
playback” window.

Note
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following cases:
– Network services are being used.
– Contents are being played from a USB device or iPod/iPhone.
– Zones are turned on.

Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Creating a shared folder

Playing music files on a shared folder

Right-click the folder that you want to share.

In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a
shared folder on your computer.

■ Setting the sharing options

1
2
3
4

Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”, select
“Share”.

Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage) through the
AV receiver.

Windows 7 Setup

Select “Choose homegroup and sharing options” on
the Control Panel.
Tip
• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set to
“Category”.

2
3

Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.
Under “Home or Work”, verify that the following
items are checked:
“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and
printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with
network access can read and write files in the Public
folders”, and “Turn off password protected sharing”.

Select “Properties”.
On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced Sharing”.

Check the check box of “Share this folder” and then
click “OK”.

Select and add “Everyone” from the pull-down
menu and then click “Share”.

Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting “Network
Service” in the Home menu.

Use q/w/e/r to select “Home Media”, and press
ENTER.

Use q/w to select a server, and then press ENTER.

Tip
• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the folder.
If you want to assign a user name and password to the
folder, make the corresponding settings for “Permissions”
in “Advanced Sharing” of the “Sharing” tab.
• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.
Note
• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to the
instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.

Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the
confirmation screen.

On the remote controller, press RECEIVER
followed by NET.
The network service screen appears. The NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, confirm the network
connection.

Tip
• The server name of your computer can be viewed on the
computer properties screen.

Use q/w to select the desired shared folder and then
press ENTER.

When asked for a user name and password, enter
the necessary login information.
Tip
• The login information will be remembered for the next time
you log in.
• The login information is that of the user account set when
creating a shared folder.

En-33

Use q/w to select a music file and then press ENTER
or 1.
The playback of the selected file starts.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Listening to AM/FM Radio
This section describes the procedure of using the
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.

Using the Tuner
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets for
quick selection.
You can also change the frequency steps (➔ page 74).

■ Auto tuning mode

■ Tuning into stations by frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering
the appropriate frequency.

Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator
lights on the AV receiver’s display.

Press TUNING q/w.
Searching stops when a station is found.

Tuning into Radio Stations

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator lights as shown.

Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Each time you press TUNER, the radio band changes
between AM and FM.
Band

On the remote controller, press TUNER repeatedly
to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

TUNED
AUTO

Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter
the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5 or 8,
7, 5, 0.
If you have entered the wrong number, you can retry
after 8 seconds.

Frequency

FM STEREO
Tip
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

■ Manual tuning mode
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.

Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator
goes off on the AV receiver’s display.

Press and hold TUNING q/w.
The frequency stops changing when you release the
button.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency
one step at a time.

Presetting AM/FM Stations
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations as presets.

Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to store
as a preset.
See the previous section.

Press MEMORY.
The preset number flashes.

(Actual display depends on the country.)

While the preset number is flashing (about 8
seconds), use PRESET e/r to select a preset from
1 through 40.
To be continued

En-34

Turning On & Basic Operations

Press MEMORY again to store the station or
channel.
The station or channel is stored and the preset number
stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM/FM
radio stations.

■ Selecting Presets

To select a preset, use PRESET e/r on the AV
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.
Tip
• You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to
select a preset directly.

Using RDS (excluding North American
models)
RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available.
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator lights.
When the station is broadcasting text information, the text
can be displayed.
■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed by
the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available
in most European countries. Many FM stations use it these
days. In addition to displaying text information, RDS can
also help you find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport,
rock, etc.).

Note
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV receiver
may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station. Also,
unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported
characters are received. This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be
displayed intermittently or not at all.

■ Displaying Radio Text (RT)

Press RT/PTY/TP once.
The RT information scrolls across the AV receiver’s
display.
Note
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV receiver
waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT information
is available.

■ Deleting Presets

Select the preset that you want to delete.
See the previous section.

While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
MODE.
The preset is deleted and its number disappears from
the AV receiver’s display.

The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information:
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Pressing
DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds.
RT (Radio Text)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the AV receiver’s
display as described in the next section.
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type.
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (➔ page 36).

En-35

■ Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for radio stations by type.

Press RT/PTY/TP twice.
The current program type appears on the AV
receiver’s display.

Use PRESET e/r to select the type of program
you want.
See the table shown later in this chapter.

To start the search, press the enter button.
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of the
type you specified, at which point it stops briefly
before continuing with the search.

When a station you want to listen to is found, press
the enter button.
If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”
appears.

Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Listening to Traffic News (TP)

RDS program types (PTY)

You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.

Type

Display

None

Press RT/PTY/TP three times.
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traffic
Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV receiver’s
display. If “TP” without square brackets appears, this
means that the station is not broadcasting TP.

News reports

News

Current affairs

Affairs

Information

Info

Sport

Education

Educate

To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press
the enter button.
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that’s
broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”
appears.

Drama

Culture

Science and technology

Science

Varied

Pop music

Pop M

Rock music

Rock M

Middle of the road music

Easy M

Light classics

Light M

Serious classics

Classics

Other music

Other M

Weather

Finance

Children’s programmes

Children

Social affairs

Social

Religion

Phone in

Phone In

Travel

Leisure

Jazz music

Jazz

Country music

Country

National music

Nation M

Oldies music

Oldies

Folk music

Folk M

Documentary

Document

Alarm test

TEST

Alarm

Alarm!

En-36

Playing Audio and Video from Separate
Sources
You can listen to the audio of one input source while
watching the video of another. This function takes
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input source
(PC, TV/CD, PHONO) is selected, the video input source
remains unchanged. The following procedure shows how
to listen to a CD player’s audio source connected to
TV/CD IN while watching a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s
video source connected to BD/DVD.

1
2

Press BD/DVD.

Start playback on your Blu-Ray Disc/DVD and CD
players.
You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
with the sound of your CD player.

Press TV/CD.
The audio output changes to the CD source, but the
video of previously-selected BD/DVD is retained.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Using Basic Functions
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup
With the supplied calibrated microphone,
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 automatically determines the
number of speakers connected, their size for purposes of
bass management, optimum crossover frequencies to the
subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary
listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical
problems over the listening area in both the frequency and
time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for
everyone. Audyssey MultEQ XT32 can be used with
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® (➔ pages 67, 68).
Before using this function, connect and position all of your
speakers.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 offers two ways of measuring:
the “Audyssey Quick Start” and
“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”.
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement from one
position to perform the speaker setting only.
• “Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration” uses the
measurement from eight positions to correct room
response in addition to the speaker setting.
The more positions are used in measuring, the better the
listening environment will become. We recommend using
a measurement from eight positions to create the best
listening environment.
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration takes
about 20 minutes.
Total measurement time varies depending on the number
of speakers.

Measurement procedure
To create a listening environment in your home theater that
all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ XT32 takes
measurements at up to eight positions within the listening
area. Position the microphone at ear height of a seated
listener with the microphone tip pointed directly at the
ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold the microphone in your
hand during measurements as this will produce inaccurate
results.
■ First measurement position
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 uses the measurements from
this position to calculate speaker distance, level,
polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the
subwoofer.
■ Second-eighth measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the places
where the other listeners will sit). You can measure up
to eight positions.

def
cab
gh
: Listening area

a to h: Listening position

En-37

Note
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and Radio
Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers,
or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if it is not in use)
or place it away from all audio electronics.
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each speaker
as Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup
runs.
• Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup
cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is connected.

Turning On & Basic Operations

1
2

Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the AV receiver
is connected.
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main
Listening Position a, and connect it to the SETUP
MIC jack.

If “Speakers Type (Front)” is set to “Digital
Crossover”, a confirmation screen appears. Select
“Next (2-7. Digital Processing Crossover Network)”
to display the screen for Digital Processing Crossover
Network (➔ page 63). Continue with the settings.

8
9

When prompted, repeat step 7.
Use q/w to select an option, and then press ENTER.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY

-- Review Speaker Configuration --

SETUP MIC jack

Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB, and
then press ENTER.
Test tones are played through the subwoofer. Use the
volume control on the subwoofer.

Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Front Wide
Front High
Surround Back
Surround Back Ch

Note

The speaker setting menu appears.
Note
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is connected
to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is connected to other
video outputs, use the AV receiver’s display when changing
settings.

Use q/w to select “Audyssey Quick Start” or
“Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full Calibration”, and
then press ENTER.

Press ENTER.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup starts.
Test tones are played through each speaker as
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes.
Please refrain from talking during measurements
and do not stand between speakers and the
microphone.
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the setup.
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go to
step 9.

When you’ve finished making the settings, press
ENTER.
MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY

Speakers Type(Front)
Powered Zone 2
Powered Zone 3
Preout to External Amplifier
Subwoofer

Normal
No
No
No
Yes

Perform the “Speaker Setup” according to your
speaker configuration:
– Speakers Type (Front) (➔ page 59)
– Powered Zone 2 (➔ page 59)
– Powered Zone 3 (➔ page 59)
– Preout to External Amplifier (➔ page 59)
– Subwoofer (➔ page 60)

If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4. If not,
go to step 5.

Save
Cancel

• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, disregard
the displayed level and press ENTER to proceed to the next
step.
• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its maximum
and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB, leave the
subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum and press
ENTER to proceed to the next step.

Speaker setup microphone

Yes
40Hz
40Hz
100Hz
None
100Hz
120Hz
2ch

Place the speaker setup microphone at the next
position, and then press ENTER.
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.

En-38

The options are:
` Save:
Save the calculated settings and exit
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup.
` Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
Tip
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by
using e/r.

To be continued

Turning On & Basic Operations

Use q/w to select a target, and use e/r to change
the setting.
After the results of Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 have
been saved, the menu will display the “Audyssey”
(➔ page 67), “Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 67),
“Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 68) settings.

Error Messages

Changing the Speaker Setup Manually

While Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error messages
below may appear.

You can manually make changes to the settings found
during Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup.
See also:
• “Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 60)
• “Speaker Distance” (➔ page 61)
• “Level Calibration” (➔ page 61)
• “Equalizer Settings” (➔ page 62)

MultEQ XT32: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY

Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.

11
12

Ambient noise is too high.

Note

Press ENTER.

Retry
Cancel

Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.

Note
• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by
disconnecting the setup microphone.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically
when Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup starts.
• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup
again, as room EQ characteristics may have changed.

Error message

The options are:
` Retry:
Try again.
` Cancel:
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup.
• Ambient noise is too high.
The background noise is too loud. Remove the source of
the noise and try again.
• Speaker Matching Error!
The number of speakers detected was different from that
of the first measurement. Check the speaker connection.
• Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again. If
this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts, contact your
Onkyo dealer.
• Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “No”
means that no speaker was detected.
Tip
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings
(➔ page 13).

En-39

• Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be set
to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your speakers using
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker Setup,
please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to
“80Hz(THX)” crossover (➔ page 60).
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and
the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level
and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice
irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main
speakers. If this happens, THX recommends setting them
manually.

Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
detected by Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s
volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest crossover
frequency, and then try running Audyssey MultEQ XT32
Room Correction and Speaker Setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, detection
issues may occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Using the Listening Modes
Selecting Listening Modes
See “About Listening Modes” for detailed information
about the listening modes.
■ Listening Mode Buttons
Press RECEIVER first.

MUSIC
MOVIE/TV

PURE AUDIO

GAME
THX

MOVIE/TV button
This button selects the listening modes intended for use
with movies and TV.
MUSIC button
This button selects the listening modes intended for use
with music.
GAME button
This button selects the listening modes intended for use
with video games.
THX button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
PURE AUDIO button and indicator
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display and
analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video signals
input through HDMI input can be output from the HDMI
output. The indicator lights when this mode is selected.
Pressing this button again will select the previous listening
mode.
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to
the AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial,
optical, or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depends on the format
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying
Source Information” (➔ page 48).
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select the
following listening modes: Pure Audio, Mono, Direct, and
Stereo.

MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX

En-40

About Listening Modes
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
■ Explanatory Notes

c ij

de gh
a b Front speakers
c Center speaker
d e Surround speakers
f Subwoofer(s)
g h Surround back speakers
i j Front high speakers
k l Front wide speakers

kl f

Turning On & Basic Operations
SP (speaker layout)

M*2

Listening mode buttons

Input Source
The following audio formats are supported by the listening
modes.
A

This is mono (monophonic) sound.

This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two
independent audio signal channels are reproduced
through two speakers.

This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround
system has five main channels of sound and a sixth
subwoofer channel (called the point-one channel).

This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a
further sound enhancement to 5.1-channel sound
with two additional speakers that provide greater
sound envelopment and more accurate positioning
of sounds.

This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround
system can produce a discrete or a matrix-encoded
sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded
material.

This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This
provides a center back surround channel from 5.1channel sources.

Speaker Layout
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each
channel. See “Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup
(➔ page 60).

N*1

En-41

Press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker layout) repeatedly
to select the speakers you want to use: front high, front wide,
or surround back.
After enabling the corresponding speakers, press RECEIVER
followed by SP (speaker layout) repeatedly to select the layout
you want to use. These layouts are only available when
“Preout to External Amplifier” (➔ page 59) is enabled.

Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes
Listening Mode

Description

Orchestra

Suitable for classical or operatic music, this
mode emphasizes the surround channels in
order to widen the stereo image, and
simulates the natural reverberation of a large
hall.

Or ches t r a

Unplugged
Un p l u g g e d

Studio-Mix
S t u d i o –M i x

TV Logic
TV

Log i c

Game-RPG
G ame – RPG

Game-Action
G ame – A c t i o n

Game-Rock
G ame – R o c k

Game-Sports
G ame – S p o r t s

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

A CNM
S
D
F
G
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals and H
jazz, this mode emphasizes the front stereo
image, giving the impression of being right
in front of the stage.
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to
music in this mode creates a lively sound
field with a powerful acoustic image, like
being at a club or rock concert.

Listening Mode

Description

All Ch Stereo

Ideal for background music, this mode fills A XCN
the entire listening area with stereo sound
S M
from the front, surround, and surround back D
speakers.
F
In this mode, all speakers output the same
G
sound in mono, so the sound you hear is the H
same regardless of where you are within the
listening room.

A l l

S t e r eo

Full Mono
Fu l l

Mo n o

T-D (TheaterDimensional)
T–D

This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV
shows produced in a TV studio, surround
effects to the entire sound, and clarity to
voices.
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic feel
with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra
mode.
In this mode, sound localization is distinct
with emphasis on bass.
In this mode, sound pressure is emphasized
to heighten live feel.
In this mode, reverberation is increased and
sound localization decreased slightly.

En-42

With this mode you can enjoy a virtual
surround sound even with only two or three
speakers. This works by controlling how
sounds reach the listener’s left and right ears.
Good results may not be possible if there’s
too much reverb, so we recommend that you
use this mode in an environment with little
or no natural reverb.

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

ZXC
NM

Turning On & Basic Operations
■ Listening Modes
Listening Mode

Description

Pure Audio*1

In this mode, the display and video circuitry
are turned off, minimizing possible noise
sources for the ultimate in high-fidelity
audio reproduction. (As the analog video
circuitry is turned off, only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output from
the HDMI output.)

Pu r eAAu d i o

Direct

Stereo

Sound is output from the front left and right
speakers and subwoofer.

S t e r eo

Mono

A ZXC
S N*2M
D
F
G
H

Multichannel
Mu l t i c h

DSD

Dolby Digital
D

Description

DTS

In this mode, audio from the input source is D XCN
output without surround-sound processing.
M
The speaker configuration (presence of
speakers), crossover frequency, speaker
D XCN
distance, A/V Sync and much of the
M
processing set via the audio setup are
F XCN*2
enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more
M
details (➔ page 51).
D XCN
M

DTS

D T S – HD

DTS-HD Master
Audio

DTS Express

D XCN
M

DTS

Exp r ess

96 / 24

DTS-ES Discrete*6
ES

Plus*4

In this mode, audio from the input source is D XCN
output without surround-sound processing.
M
The speaker configuration (presence of
speakers), crossover frequency, speaker
distance, A/V Sync and much of the
processing set via the audio setup are
D XCN
enabled. See “On-screen Setup” for more
details (➔ page 51).
M

Dolby TrueHD
T r u e HD

Speaker
Layout

F XCN*2
M

DTS 96/24*5

ZXC
NM

Input
Source

D T S – HD MS T R

D i sc r e t e

DTS-ES Matrix*6
ES Ma t r i x

F XCN*2
M

Do l b y

This mode is for use with PCM multichannel D XCN
sources.
F M

DSD*3

Dolby Digital

Listening Mode

DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio

Use this mode when watching an old movie
with a mono soundtrack, or use it with the
foreign language soundtracks recorded in the
left and right channels of some movies. It
can also be used with DVDs or other sources
containing multiplexed audio, such as
karaoke DVDs.

Mo n o

Do l b y

Speaker
Layout

In this mode, audio from the input source is
output without surround-sound processing.
The speaker configuration (presence of
speakers) and speaker distance settings are
enabled, but much of the processing set via
the audio setup is disabled. See “On-screen
Setup” for more details (➔ page 51).

D i r ec t

Do l b y

Input
Source

D XCN
M
F XCN*2
M

En-43

This mode is for use with DTS 96/24
sources. This is high-resolution DTS with a
96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit resolution,
providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.

D XCN
M

This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete G V
soundtracks, which use a discrete surround
J
back channel for true 6.1/7.1-channel
K
playback. The seven totally separate audio
channels provide better spatial imaging and
360-degree sound localization, perfect for
sounds that pan across the surround
channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the
DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTSES Discrete soundtrack.
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix
G V
soundtracks, which use a matrix-encoded
J
back-channel for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
K
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix
soundtrack.

Turning On & Basic Operations
Listening Mode

Description

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

Dolby Pro Logic IIx*7 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel
source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides
Dolby Pro Logic II
a very natural and seamless surround-sound
PL
Mo v i e
experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games
PL
Mu s i c
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial
effects and vivid imaging.
PL

Game

Mo v i e

Mu s i c

Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height
PL

He i g h t

Dolby EX
Do l b y

Do l b y

If you’re not using any surround back
S XCN
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used
M
instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially
those that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
• Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
modes to expand 5.1-channel sources for
7.1-channel playback.

D V
H J
K

Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to
more effectively use existing program
material when height channel speaker
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height can be used to upmix a variety of
sources from movies and music, but are
particularly well-suited to upmix game
content.

S B
D J
F L
G
H

Listening Mode

Description

DTS Neo:X*8

This mode expands various sources and
various inputs up to 9.1 channel.
DTS Neo:X provides semi-spherical sound
field adding height/wide speakers to create a
natural, immersive and spacious surround
soundscape.

Ne o : X
6

C i n ema

Ne o : X

Mu s i c

Ne o : X

Game

Audyssey DSX*9
Audy s s e y

These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for D V
6.1/7.1-channel playback. They’re especially H J
suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include
K
a matrix-encoded surround back channel.
The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping
surround sound experience, perfect for
rotating and fly-by sound effects.

En-44

DSX

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

• DTS Neo:X Cinema
This mode is suitable for movie viewing.
• DTS Neo:X Music
This mode is suitable for any music source.
• DTS Neo:X Game
This mode is suitable for video games.

S XCN
D M
F
G
H

• Audyssey DSX
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system that
adds new speakers to improve surround
impression. Starting with a 5.1 system
Audyssey DSX first adds Wide channels
for the biggest impact on envelopment.
Research in human hearing has proven that
information from the Wide channels is
much more critical in the presentation of a
realistic soundstage than Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1 systems.
Audyssey DSX then creates a pair of
Height channels to reproduce the next most
important acoustical and perceptual cues.
In addition to these new Wide and Height
channels, Audyssey DSX applies Surround
Envelopment Processing to enhance the
blend between the front and surround
channels.

D B
F bM
G
H

Turning On & Basic Operations
Listening Mode

PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie +
S B
Audyssey DSX
bM
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Music +
Mu s i c DSX
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Game +
Game DSX
Audyssey DSX
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx
and Audyssey DSX® modes can be used.
x Mo v i e DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie +
D J
x Mu s i c DSX
Audyssey DSX
H K
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music +
Audyssey DSX
x Game DSX
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx
and Audyssey DSX modes can be used.
Mo v i e

Do l b y

THX

Description

DSX

The combination of Dolby EX and
Audyssey DSX modes can be used.

Listening Mode

THX

C i n ema

N
TH
eX
o :M
6us i c
THX

D NM
H

Founded by George Lucas, THX develops
stringent standards that ensure movies are
reproduced in movie theaters and home
theaters just as the director intended. THX
Modes carefully optimize the tonal and
spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for
reproduction in the home-theater
environment. They can be used with 2channel matrixed and multichannel sources.
Surround back speaker output depends on
the source material and the selected listening
mode.

Game s

Description

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

• THX Cinema
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical
soundtracks for playback in a home theater
environment. In this mode, THX Loudness
Plus is configured for cinema levels and
Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive
Decorrelation are active.
• THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to
music, which is typically mastered at
significantly higher levels than movies. In
this mode, THX Loudness Plus is
configured for music playback and only
Timbre Matching is active.
• THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for spatially
accurate playback of game audio, which is
often mixed similarly to movies but in a
smaller environment. THX Loudness Plus
is configured for game audio levels, with
Timbre Matching active.

D CNM
F
G
H

• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Movie + THX S CNM
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Music + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*7 Game + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx
and THX Cinema/Music/Games modes can
be used.
The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light
on the AV receiver’s display.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX
D V
Cinema
H J
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX Music
K
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx
and THX Cinema/Music modes can be
used.
The PLIIx and THX indicators light on the
AV receiver’s display.

En-45

Turning On & Basic Operations
Listening Mode

Description

Input
Source

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
The PLIIz and THX indicators light on the
AV receiver’s display.

S B
D J
F L
G
H

• DTS Neo:X Cinema + THX Cinema
• DTS Neo:X Music + THX Music
• DTS Neo:X Game + THX Games
The combination of DTS Neo:X
Cinema/Music/Game and THX Cinema/
Music/Games modes can be used. The
Neo:X indicator lights on the AV
receiver’s display.
TH
N
eX
o : S
62

C i n ema

THX

Mu s i c

THX

Game s

THX

Su r r

Speaker
Layout

Listening Mode

Input
Source

Speaker
Layout

• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX Select2 S V
Games
J
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II
K
Game and THX Select2 Games modes can
be used. The PLII and THX indicators
light on the AV receiver’s display.

• THX Select2 Cinema
D V
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for H J
7.1- channel playback. It does this by
K
analyzing the composition of the surround
source, optimizing the ambient and
directional sounds to produce the surround
back channel output.
• THX Select2 Music
This mode is designed for use with music.
It expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1channel playback.
• THX Select2 Games
This mode is designed for use with video
games. It can expand 5.1-channel sources
for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

Description

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Select2 Cinema/
Music/Games modes can be used.

S J
D
H

• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Select2 Music

D J
H

Note
*1

Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.
Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will
automatically switch to Direct.
*2 Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output
the sound.
*3 The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player, setting the
output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.
*4 For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.
*5 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.
*6 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
*7 If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*8 DTS Neo:X cannot be selected in the case of 192 kHz input signals.
*9 This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
– Center speaker is connected.
– Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.

• THX Surround EX
D V
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for H J
6.1/7.1- channel playback. It’s especially
K
suited to Dolby Digital EX sources. THX
Surround EX, also known as Dolby Digital
Surround EX, is a joint development
between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.

En-46

Turning On & Basic Operations

Using the Home Menu
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently used
menus.
The Home menu appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.

Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
Tip
• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.

Use e/r or q/w and ENTER to make the desired
selection.
Press HOME to close the menu.

■ Network Service
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ page 107).
` With this selection, you can use various Internet radio
services or play the contents stored in media connected
to your home network (DLNA) (➔ pages 29 to 32).
Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short
while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait
until it becomes operable.
Press ENTER to display the network service screen.
If you want to use the Internet radio services, use
q/w/e/r to select the desired service. Pressing
ENTER again switches to that selection. If you want
to play music files on a server, use q/w/e/r to
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER.
■ USB
` With this selection, you can play contents of portable
players (iPod, etc.) and USB storage devices connected
to the AV receiver’s USB port (➔ pages 28, 29).
Note that this selection will be grayed out for a short
while after the AV receiver is turned on. Please wait
until it becomes operable.
First, press USB repeatedly to select the
“USB(Front)” or “USB(Rear)” input.
Then, press ENTER to select a drive or browse the
contents of the media connected, followed by q/w to
select the desired folder or track. Pressing ENTER as
a track is selected will start playback.
Note
• Only the front-panel USB input is compatible with iPod/iPhone.

■ InstaPrevue
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI
IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT). Even with multiple
components connected through HDMI, you can easily
switch between inputs as their previews are displayed
on a single screen.
Press ENTER to display the main preview (currently
selected HDMI input) and the additional previews
(other HDMI inputs). Using q/w or e/r to select a
preview thumbnail and pressing ENTER will switch
the AV receiver to that input source.
Tip
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be filled in
black.
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as well as
their positioning on screen (➔ page 76).
Note
• This function cannot be selected when:
– HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or
– No signal is present on the current input source.
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly
rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.

■ Setup
`With this selection, you can access the common
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu
(➔ page 55).
Tip
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick
Setup (➔ page 51).

■ Firmware Update
`With this selection, you can update the firmware of the
AV receiver. Note that this selection will be grayed out
for a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.
Please wait until it becomes operable.
Press ENTER to start the procedure (➔ page 97).

En-47

Turning On & Basic Operations

With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn
off automatically after a specified period.

You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.

Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in 10
minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display when the sleep timer has been set. The
specified sleep time appears for about 5 seconds, then
the previous display reappears.

Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY
repeatedly to cycle through the available
information.
Tip

The following information can be typically displayed.
Input source
Listening mode

• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,
press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on SLEEP as
the time being displayed is 10 minutes or less, the sleep
timer will go off.

Signal format*1
Sampling
frequency

Press TV/CD or GAME1.
“TV/CD” or “GAME1” appears on the AV receiver’s
display.

Press and hold down the same button (about
3 seconds) to change the input display.
Repeat this step to select the desired input display.

■ TV/CD:

TV/CD → DOCK
TAPE

■ GAME1:

GAME1 ↔ DOCK

Note
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD”, “GAME1”
input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the
remote controller for the first time (➔ page 86).

Output resolution

Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER
repeatedly to cycle through the following patterns:
• Normal brightness + indicator off.
• Dim brightness + indicator off.
• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.
• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).

“

Input signal
resolution

Setting the Display Brightness

When you connect an u-capable Onkyo component, you
must configure the input display so that u can work
properly.
This setting can be done only from the front panel.

• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV receiver.

Tip

You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s display,
and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator off and on
in conjunction.

Changing the Input Display

→

Displaying Source Information

→

Using the Sleep Timer

If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the
previously displayed information reappears.

Tip
• (North American models) Alternatively, you can use
DIMMER on the AV receiver.

En-48

Turning On & Basic Operations

Using the Whole House Mode
The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to add
extra background music to your home party; this allows
you to enjoy the same stereo music as the main room in
separate rooms (Zone 2/3).
The Whole House Mode selects the same input source for
Multi Zone as the main room’s.
See also:
• “Speaker Setup” (➔ page 59)
• “Multi Zone” (➔ page 78)

Press WHOLE HOUSE MODE on the front panel.
To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the input
source for the main room or select a listening mode
(➔ page 40).
Note
• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio.
• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV receiver
to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the Volume for
Zones” (➔ page 80) for the volume adjustment of Multi
Zone.
• The Whole House Mode is not available in the following
cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 75).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 75)
and you’re listening through your TV speakers.
– Digital Processing Crossover Network is used
(➔ page 63).

• Playback conditions may be limited depending on the settings in “Speaker Settings” (➔ page 59) and “Speaker
Configuration” (➔ page 60).
• When a listening mode which doesn’t support front high,
front wide or surround back speakers is used, this setting
cannot be selected.

Selecting Speaker Layout
You can set which speakers you want to use by priority.

Press RECEIVER followed by SP (speaker layout)
repeatedly to select:
■ 9.1 ch playback

Muting the AV Receiver

Important:
• The following layouts are only available when the
“Preout to External Amplifier” setting (➔ page 59)
and all corresponding speakers are enabled.

` Speaker Layout:SB/FH:
The sounds from surround back and front high
speakers are output by priority.
` Speaker Layout:SB/FW:
The sounds from surround back and front wide
speakers are output by priority.
` Speaker Layout:FH/FW:
The sounds from front high and front wide
speakers are output by priority.
■ 7.1 ch playback
` Speaker Layout:FH:
The sound from front high speakers is output by
priority.
` Speaker Layout:FW:
The sound from front wide speakers is output by
priority.
` Speaker Layout:SB:
The sound from surround back speakers is
output by priority.
Note
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”
or “Digital Crossover”.
– The “Powered Zone 2/3” setting is set to “Yes” and
Zone 2/3 is turned on.

En-49

You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.

Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.
Tip
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV receiver is
set to standby.

Using Headphones

Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a
standard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the PHONES
jack.
While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, = indicator lights.
Note
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Powered Zone 2/3
speakers are not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening mode
is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono,
Direct, or Pure Audio.
• If you connect an iPod or iPhone to the USB port on the AV
receiver, no sound will be output from the headphones jack.

Turning On & Basic Operations

Using Easy Macros
By using ACTIVITIES in Easy macro mode, you can
sequentially operate Onkyo components via simple
commands from a single-button press.
These commands are user-definable. See “Using Normal
Macros” (➔ page 90).

Press ACTIVITIES (MY MOVIE, MY TV, or
MY MUSIC) to start the Easy macro command.
The default sequences of actions are described below.
To change the related source component, see
“Changing the Source Components” shown later in
this chapter.

■ MY MOVIE
First, the TV, the Onkyo DVD player, and the AV receiver
are turned on. The input selector is set to “BD/DVD”.
Finally the player starts playback.*1
*1

Depending on the start-up time of your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player, the AV receiver may not activate this playback
command. In this case, press 1 on the remote controller.

■ MY TV
First, the TV, the cable set-top box, and the AV receiver
are turned on. Then the input selector is set to
“CBL/SAT”.
■ MY MUSIC
The Onkyo CD player and the AV receiver are turned on.
The input selector is set to “TV/CD”. Finally, the player
starts playback.
Note

Turning Off the Components

Restoring Default

This button turns off all components activated by the Easy
Macro mode.

You can restore ACTIVITIES to the default settings.

Press ALL OFF.

First, the related components stop and turn off. Second, the
AV receiver turns off. Finally, the TV turns off (or enters
standby mode).*1*2
*1
*2

This step doesn’t apply to MY MUSIC, with the default
settings.
With some televisions, the power may not be turned off (or
enter standby mode).

Changing the Source Components
You can change the source components activated by the
Easy Macro mode.

While holding down REMOTE MODE for the
playback component you wish to assign, press and
hold down the ACTIVITIES to be changed
(MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC) (about 3
seconds).
ACTIVITIES flashes twice, indicating that the change
is complete.

Examples:
If you wished to use MY MUSIC to start the Onkyo
cassette recorder, you would press and hold down
MY MUSIC (about 3 seconds) while holding down TV/CD
until it flashes twice.

• While the Easy Macro command is being processed, you cannot
use other ACTIVITIES. If you want to operate other components,
first press ALL OFF and use the desired ACTIVITIES.

En-50

While holding down HOME, press and hold down
ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds).

Release HOME and ALL OFF, and press ALL OFF
again.
ALL OFF flashes twice.

Advanced Operations

On-screen Setup

Using the Quick Setup

With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the Quick
Setup or the Setup menu (HOME).
■ Quick Setup
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently used
settings. You can change settings and view the current
information.

RECEIVER

ENTER
q/w/e/r

■ Setup menu (HOME)
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way to
change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are
organized into 9 categories.
The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.

Q SETUP

RETURN

Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV
screen.

Use q/w and ENTER to make the desired selection.
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.

This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller unless otherwise specified.

Explanatory Notes
a
b

■ Music Optimizer
` Off
` On

a Setting target
b Setting options (default setting underlined)

BD/DVD
Input
Audio
Video
Information
Listening Mode

■ Input
`You can select input sources and view the following
information: the name of input selectors, input
assignments, radio information, and ARC function
setting.
In addition, previews of the video streams coming from
HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT) are
displayed.*1
Use q/w to select an input source and view the
related information. Pressing ENTER switches to the
selected input source.
■ Audio (➔ page 52)
`You can change the following settings: “Sound
Program”, “Bass”, “Treble”, “Subwoofer Level”,
“Center Level”, “Dolby Volume*2”, “Audyssey”,
“Dynamic EQ*2*3”, “Dynamic Volume*2*3”, “Late
Night”, “Music Optimizer”, “Re-EQ”,
“Re-EQ(THX)” and “Screen Centered Dialog”.
■ Video*4
`You can change the following settings: “Wide Mode”
and “Picture Mode*5”.
See also:
• “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 69)
■ Information*6
`You can view the information of the following items:
“Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.
■ Listening Mode*7
`You can select the listening modes that are grouped in
the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”, “MUSIC”,
“GAME”, and “THX”.
Use q/w to select the category and e/r to select the
listening mode. Press ENTER to switch to the
selected listening mode.
To be continued

En-51

Advanced Operations
Note
*1

*6
*7

• The video preview is not displayed when:
– HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or
– No signal is present on the current input source.
• The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on the
main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.
“Dolby Volume”, “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume”
cannot be selected when any of the THX listening modes is
selected, with “Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve
THX Settings” set to “Yes” (➔ page 62).
When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On” or “Dynamic Volume”
is set to anything else than “Off”, “Dolby Volume” will be
switched to “Off” (➔ page 65).
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, “Video”
cannot be selected (➔ page 57).
• This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector.
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture
Mode” (➔ page 70), pressing ENTER allows you to adjust
the following items via the Quick Setup: “Brightness”,
“Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press RETURN to
return to the “Picture Mode” setting.
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not all
channels shown here output the sound.
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 75).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 75) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.

Using the Audio Settings of Quick
Setup
You can change various audio settings from the Quick
Setup (➔ page 51).
Note
• These settings are not available in either of the following cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 75).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 75) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.

Sound Program
■ Sound Program
` Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo Source 3,
Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2, Multich
Source 3
` Off
With this setting, you can select the combination of
settings that you registered in “Sound Program Edit”
(➔ page 66).
Note
• If the input selector is changed, the “Sound Program” setting is
switched back to “Off”.

Tone Control
■ Bass
` –10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output
from the front speakers.
■ Treble
` –10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output
from the front speakers.
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening
mode is selected.

En-52

Operating on the AV receiver

Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass” or
“Treble”.

Use – and + to adjust.

Speaker Levels
■ Subwoofer Level
`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps
■ Center Level
`–12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening
to an input source.
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV
receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you made
here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ page 61) before
setting the AV receiver to standby.
Note
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is muted.
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is
connected.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in “Speaker
Configuration” (➔ page 60) cannot be adjusted.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, “Subwoofer Level” cannot
be used if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” in “Sound
Program Edit”.

Advanced Operations

Dolby Volume

Late Night

Music Optimizer

■ Dolby Volume
See “Dolby Volume” of “Audio Adjust” (➔ page 65).

■ Late Night
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the
options are:
` Off
` Low:
Small reduction in dynamic range.
` High:
Large reduction in dynamic range.

■ Music Optimizer
`Off
`On
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality
of compressed music files. When set to “On”, the M.Opt
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.

Note
• This setting cannot be used in either of the following cases:
– The Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected.
– Any of the THX listening modes is selected, with “Loudness
Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings” set to “Yes”
(➔ page 62).
• When “Dolby Volume” is set to “On”, the “Dynamic EQ” and
“Dynamic Volume” settings of all input selectors are switched to
“Off”.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be made
with “Sound Program Edit”.

Audyssey®
■ Audyssey
See “Audyssey” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 67).
■ Dynamic EQ
See “Dynamic EQ” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 67).
■ Dynamic Volume
See “Dynamic Volume” in “Source Setup” (➔ page 68).
Note
• These technologies can be used when all the following conditions
are met:
– Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note that
“Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Full
Calibration” method.
– Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio is selected.
– A pair of headphones is not connected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with
“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings” set to
“Yes” (➔ page 62).
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be made
with “Sound Program Edit”.

For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
` Auto:
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”
automatically.
` Off
` On
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of Dolby
Digital material so that you can still hear quiet parts even
when listening at low volume levels—ideal for watching
movies late at night when you don’t want to disturb
anyone.
Note
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material that
you are playing and the intention of the original sound designer,
and with some material there will be little or no effect when you
select the different options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source
is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby TrueHD.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is
set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set to
“Auto”.
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot be
used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to “Off”.
• The Late Night function cannot be used when “Dolby Volume”
is set to “On”.

En-53

Note
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and analog
audio input signals.
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio
listening mode is selected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• When “Sound Program” is enabled, the setting must be made
with “Sound Program Edit”.

Advanced Operations

Re-EQ

Screen Centered Dialog

With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.

By using the front high speaker, this function moves the
center image of dialogs etc. upwards, so that the image of
dialogs is fixed to the display height.

■ Re-EQ
` Off
` On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD,
Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express, DSD, Dolby EX,
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS
Neo:X Cinema.

■ Screen Centered Dialog
As the value increases, the center image moves upwards.
`0
` 1 to 5:
Screen Centered Dialog on.

■ Re-EQ(THX)
` Off
` On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
THX Select2 Cinema.

Note
• The “Screen Centered Dialog” can be used when a compatible
listening mode is selected.
• This setting cannot be used while a pair of headphones is
connected.

Note
• These settings are stored individually for each input selector. In
THX listening mode however, the setting will return to “On”
when the AV receiver is turned off.
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones is
connected.

En-54

Advanced Operations

Using the Setup Menu (HOME)

■ Screen Saver
If there is no video signal on the current input source and
no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.

Explanatory Notes
a

Main Menu

Speaker Setup

Speaker Configuration

c
d

■ Subwoofer
` Yes
` No

Tip

RECEIVER

ENTER
q/w/e/r

• The time until the screen saver activates itself can be changed
in the “Screen Saver” setting (➔ page 74).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV receiver is
operated.

a Main Menu
b Sub Menu
c Setting target
d Setting options (default setting underlined)

RETURN
HOME

1
2
3

Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
Use e/r to select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.
Use q/w to select a main menu item, and then press
ENTER.

Use q/w to select a sub menu item, and then press
ENTER.

Use q/w to select a setting target, and use e/r to
change the setting.
Press HOME to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.

Sub Menu
Main Menu

Note
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by
using SETUP, the cursor and enter (middle) buttons.
• During Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen will
appear on the AV receiver’s display.

En-55

Advanced Operations

About the HYBRID STANDBY Indicator
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces power
consumption when the AV receiver is in standby mode.
The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will light in either of
the following conditions:
– “HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is
off).
– “Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator is
off).

Setup Menu Items

Main menu item

Sub menu item

Listening Mode Preset

BD/DVD

(➔ page 72)

CBL/SAT

Main menu item

Sub menu item

Input/Output Assign
(➔ page 57)

Monitor Out

STB/DVR

HDMI Input

GAME1

Component Video Input

GAME2

Digital Audio Input

Speaker Setup

Speaker Settings

AUX

(➔ page 59)

Speaker Configuration

TUNER

Speaker Distance

TV/CD

Level Calibration

PHONO

Equalizer Settings

NET

HYBRID STANDBY

USB

THX Audio Setup
Digital Processing Crossover
Network

Miscellaneous

Volume Setup

(➔ page 73)

OSD Setup

Audio Adjust

Multiplex/Mono

Hardware Setup

Tuner

(➔ page 64)

Dolby

(➔ page 74)

HDMI

DTS

Auto Standby

Audyssey DSX

Network

Theater-Dimensional
LFE Level
Sound Program Edit

Source Setup

Audyssey

(➔ page 77)

(➔ page 67)

IntelliVolume

Lock Setup

A/V Sync

(➔ page 77)

Name Edit
Picture Adjust
Note

Initial Setup

Remote Controller
Setup

Audio Selector

• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to the
Front Input (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY
indicator won’t light.

En-56

Remote ID
Remote Mode Setup
Setup

Advanced Operations

Input/Output Assign
1

Main Menu

“Setup”

Input/Output Assign

Monitor Out
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or
not to have the video sources’ images output through the
HDMI output.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI output, the “Monitor
Out” setting is automatically set and composite video and
component video sources are upconverted* and output.
Composite video,
component video

■ Monitor Out
` Main:
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
MAIN.
` Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
SUB.
` Both:
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI OUT
MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals are
output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution
supported by both TVs.
Changing the “Monitor Out” setting manually

Press MONITOR OUT on the front panel.
The current setting is displayed.

Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver
repeatedly to select:
` HDMI Main, HDMI Sub or Both.

HDMI

OUT
Composite video,
component video

HDMI

■ Resolution
`Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at
the same resolution and with no conversion.
`Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your TV.
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p:
Select the desired output resolution.
`1080p/24:
Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
`4K Upscaling:
Select this for an output resolution four times that of
1080p. Depending on the resolution supported by
your TV, it will result in either 3840 × 2160 or 4096
× 2160 pixels.
`Source:
Select this for an output following the resolution level
set in “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 69).
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported
by your TV.
Tip
• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the
“Resolution” setting (excluding NET input source).

Note
• See “Video Connection Formats” (➔ page 101) for charts
showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution” settings
affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver.

Note
• Depending on the incoming video signal, the video playback may
not be smooth or the vertical resolution may be lowered. In this
case select anything other than “1080p/24”.
• With some TVs, there may be no picture when this setting is set
to “4K Upscaling”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is fixed
to “Through”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is fixed
to “Auto”.

En-57

Advanced Operations

HDMI Input
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if
you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to HDMI IN 2,
you must assign “HDMI2” to the “BD/DVD” input
selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, composite video and component video
sources can be upconverted* and output by the HDMI
output. You can set this for each input selector by selecting
the “- - - - -” option. See “Video Connection Formats” for
more information on video signal flow and upconversion
(➔ page 101).
Composite video,
component video

HDMI

■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
` HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5,
HDMI6, HDMI7:
Select the input to which the component has been
connected.
` - - - - -:
Output composite video and component video
sources from the HDMI output. The video output
signal from the HDMI output is the one configured in
“Component Video Input”.
*1

If you connect your personal computer to PC IN (Analog
RGB), you must assign “- - - - -” to the “PC” input selector.

Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input selectors
or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI7 have already been
assigned, you must first set any unused input selectors to
“- - - - -” or you will be unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI7
to other input selectors.
Note

OUT
Composite video,
component video

HDMI

Here are the default assignments.
Input selector

Default assignment

BD/DVD

HDMI1

CBL/SAT

HDMI2

STB/DVR

HDMI3

GAME1

HDMI4

GAME2

HDMI5

HDMI6*1

AUX

FRONT (Fixed)

TV/CD

-----

PHONO

-----

• If no video component is connected to the HDMI output (even if
the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the video
source based on the setting of “Component Video Input”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained
here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the “Digital
Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use the coaxial or
optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in the “Audio
Selector” setting (➔ page 72).
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 75), otherwise
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation will
not be guaranteed.
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently
selected in “HDMI Through” (➔ page 75), the “HDMI
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.

En-58

Component Video Input
If you connect a video component to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you must assign “IN2” to
the “BD/DVD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector

Default assignment

BD/DVD

IN1

CBL/SAT

IN2

STB/DVR

-----

GAME1

-----

GAME2

-----

AUX

-----

TV/CD

-----

PHONO

-----

■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO
`IN1, IN2:
Select the input to which the component has been
connected.
`- - - - -:
Output composite video sources from the HDMI
output.

Advanced Operations

Digital Audio Input

Speaker Setup

If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if
you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1, you
must assign “OPTICAL1” to the “TV/CD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector

Default assignment

BD/DVD

COAXIAL1

CBL/SAT

COAXIAL2

STB/DVR

COAXIAL3

GAME1

OPTICAL1

GAME2

-----

AUX

FRONT (Fixed)

TV/CD

OPTICAL2

PHONO

-----

■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
` COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, COAXIAL3,
OPTICAL1, OPTICAL2:
Select the input to which the component has been
connected.
` - - - - -:
Select if the component is connected to an analog
audio input.
Note
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Input” (➔ page 58), the same HDMI IN will be set as
a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to use the
coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate selection in
the “Audio Selector” (➔ page 72).
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono) from a
digital input (optical and coaxial) are 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16,
20, 24 bit.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.

Main Menu

“Setup”

Speaker Setup

Some of the settings in this section are set automatically
by Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup (➔ page 37).
Here you can check the settings made by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup function, or set them manually, which is useful if
you change one of the connected speakers after using
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup function.

■ Speaker Impedance
`4ohms:
Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or
more but less than 6.
`6ohms:
Select if the impedances of all speakers are between 6
and 16 ohms.
■ Speakers Type (Front)
`Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers
normally.
`Bi-Amp:
Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front speakers.
`Digital Crossover:
Select this if you’re using speakers without crossover
network.
Tip

Speaker Settings
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again (➔ page 37).
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less
than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance to 4 ohms.
If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the
“Speakers Type (Front)” setting. For details on speaker
wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers”
(➔ page 16). When connecting speakers without
crossover network, you need to change the “Speakers
Type (Front)” setting beforehand. For details on
connection, refer to “Using Speakers Without Crossover
Network” (➔ page 17).
Note
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to 5.1
speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.

En-59

• If “Speakers Type (Front)” is set to “Digital Crossover”, a
confirmation screen appears. Select “Next (2-7. Digital
Processing Crossover Network)” to display the screen for
Digital Processing Crossover Network (➔ page 63). Continue
with the settings.

■ Powered Zone 2, Powered Zone 3
`No
`Yes:
Zone 2/3 speakers can be used. (Powered Zone 2/3
enabled).
■ Preout to External Amplifier
`No
`Surr Back, Front High, Front Wide
For 9.1-channel playback, select the channel output by
SB/FH/FW EXT AMP jacks. If you select speakers whose
setting in Speaker Configuration is set to “None”, it will be
automatically switched to “80Hz (THX)”.
To be continued

Advanced Operations
Note
• If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover”, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used.
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be
used.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “No”, the “Powered
Zone 3” setting cannot be selected.
• “Preout to External Amplifier” is not available in either of the
following cases:
– The “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or
“Digital Crossover”.
– The “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”.

Speaker Configuration
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup (➔ page 37).

Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is
fixed at “Full Band”.

■ Center*1, Surround*1*2
` Full Band
` 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
` None
■ Front Wide*1*3*4*6*8, Front High*1*3*5*6*7*8
` Full Band
` 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
` None
■ Surround Back*1*2*3*5*6*8
` Full Band
` 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz
` None

With these settings, you can specify which speakers are
connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker.
Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can output low
frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a
crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover
frequency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the
speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the
optimum crossover frequencies. If you set up your
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction
and Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
■ Subwoofer
` Yes
` No
■ Front
` Full Band
` 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, 200Hz

*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8

Note
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.

■ LPF of LFE
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
`Off:
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
Note
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.

Note
*1

`2ch:
Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers
are connected.

“Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is
selected in the “Front” setting.
When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” and
Zone 3 is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
This setting cannot be selected if the “Speakers Type
(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or “Digital Crossover”.
When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes”, this
setting cannot be selected.
When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and
Zone 2 is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot
be selected.
When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes”, this
setting cannot be selected.
If the “Preout to External Amplifier” setting is enabled for
these speakers, “None” cannot be selected.

■ Surround Back Ch
` 1ch:
Select if only one surround back speaker L is
connected.

En-60

■ Subwoofer Phase
`0º
`180º:
Moves the subwoofer phase.
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be
selected.

Advanced Operations
■ Double Bass
This setting is NOT set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup (➔ page 37).
` On
` Off(THX)
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding bass
sounds from the front left, right, and center channels to
the subwoofer.
Note
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is fixed to
“- - - - -”.
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the “Subwoofer”
and “Front” settings are set for the first time to “Yes” and “Full
Band” respectively.
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.

Speaker Distance
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (➔ page 37).

■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center,
Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround
Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer
` Specify the distance from each speaker to your
listening position.
Note
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in “Speaker
Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 60).
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be
used.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 3
is turned on, the surround and surround back speakers cannot be
used.

Level Calibration

■ Unit
` feet:
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 0.5ft to 30.0ft in
0.5 foot steps.
` meters:
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.15m to
9.00m in 0.15 meter steps.
(The default setting varies from country to country.)

Note
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in “Speaker
Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 60).
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, the surround back and front high speakers cannot be
used.
• When the “Powered Zone 3” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 3
is turned on, the surround and surround back speakers cannot be
used.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is
0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at
volume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will
be much louder.
*1 For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings made
by using the Quick Setup are saved in this menu (➔ page 52).
Tip

This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (➔ page 37).
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the
built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the
same at the listening position.
Note

Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the
listening position so that the sound from each speaker
arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer intended.

■ Subwoofer*1
`–15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.

• These settings cannot be calibrated in either of the following
cases:
– The “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ page 75).
– “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 75) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
– The AV receiver is muted.

■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center*1,
Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right,
Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround
Back Left, Surround Left
` –12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB steps.

En-61

• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of
each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position,
measured with C-weighting and slow reading.

Advanced Operations

Equalizer Settings

THX Audio Setup

With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The volume
of each speaker can be set (➔ page 61).

■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing
` <1ft (<0.3m)
` 1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)
` >4ft (>1.2m)
You can specify the distance between your surround back
speakers.

■ Manual Equalizer
` On:
You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker
manually. Continue with the following procedure:

Press w to select “Channel”, and then use e/r to
select a speaker.

Use q/w to select a frequency, and then use the e/r
to adjust the level at that frequency.
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from
–6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.
Tip
• You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”, “400Hz”, “1000Hz”,
“2500Hz”, “6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”. And for the
subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or
“160Hz”.
• Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds; high
frequencies (e.g., 16000Hz) affect treble sounds.

Use q to select “Channel”, and then use e/r to
select another speaker.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or
“None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
(➔ page 60).
` Off:
Tone off, response flat.

Note
• When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
equalizer settings have no effect.
• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting
(➔ page 67).

Note
• This setting is not available in any of the following cases:
– “Surround Back” is set to “None” (➔ page 60).
– “Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ page 60).
– “Powered Zone 2/3” is set to “Yes” (➔ page 59) and
Zone 2/3 is turned on (➔ page 79).

■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
` No
` Yes
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this setting
to “Yes”.
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be
selected (➔ page 60).

■ BGC
` Off
` On
You can apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation
(BGC) to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low
frequencies for listeners sitting very close to a room
boundary (i.e., wall).
Note
• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be
selected (➔ page 60).

En-62

■ Loudness Plus
`Off
`On
When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expression
at low volume. This is only available when the THX
listening mode is selected.
■ Preserve THX Settings
`Yes
`No
If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic
Volume and Dolby Volume have no effect in THX
listening mode.
Note
• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”.

■ Metadata Compatible
`On:
When Metadata Compatible is set to “On”, valid
metadata is transmitted via the HDMI connections,
and can be used by other devices in the system.
`Off:
When Metadata Compatible is set to “Off”, metadata
is not transmitted via the HDMI connections.
The HDMI connection in your system is used to deliver
uncompressed digital audio and video information from
one device to the next. There is also additional information
about this digital content that can be delivered. Such
additional information is referred to as “metadata”.
Metadata Compatible mode should be used when there are
home theater components in your system, such as Blu-ray
disc players, set top boxes and displays that use this
additional metadata. For example, Metadata Compatible
mode should be set to ON when there are THX Media
Director™ Enabled devices in the system. This ensures
that this additional information can be received by your
Onkyo AVR and can be sent to other devices that are
connected in your home theater system, with no
interruption.

Advanced Operations
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology
featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™
Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home
theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a
surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of
turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain
sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by
the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the
tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is
reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround
channel levels and frequency response. This enables
users experience the true impact of soundtracks
regardless of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is
automatically applied when listening in any THX
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and
THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX
Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.

Digital Processing Crossover Network
Digital Crossover provides a separate routing system by
splitting the audio signal into separate frequency bands
optimized for each speaker driver. It provides a fine, threedimensional sound field that extend each driver’s
performance to the uppermost. With its built-in time
alignment function, this system also adjusts the sound
shifting that occurs when there is a physical offset between
sound drivers. At a digital processing level, it corrects this
offset by delaying the related audio signal.
Although this function is meant for speakers without
crossover network, it can also be used with bi-amped
speakers.
In this case, set the crossover network on the AV receiver
as the speakers’ built-in network frequency is not used.
Tip
• This setting can be done while listening to an audio source.
• Press MODE/D (Blue) to switch from the current audio source to
test noises. Pressing MODE/D (Blue) again or the cursor buttons

will stop the test noises and switch back to the original audio
source.
Note
• This setting can only be made when “Speakers Type (Front)” is
set to “Digital Crossover” (➔ page 59).

■ Crossover
` “250Hz”, “320Hz”, “400Hz”, “500Hz, “630Hz”,
“800Hz”, “1000Hz”, “1250Hz”, “1600Hz”,
“2000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “3200Hz”, “4000Hz”,
“5000Hz”
Output Band for Test
` High + Low, High, Low:
Select the output for the audio signal.
Tip
• Pressing MODE/D (Blue) button plays band-limited test noises
which center on the specified frequency.
• We recommend choosing a crossover value that creates no
volume difference between “High” and “Low”.
Note
• Refer to your speaker manual when setting without the use of test
noises.

Cutoff frequencies of the woofers’ low-pass filter (LPF)
and the tweeters’ high-pass filter (HPF) are set according
to the frequency specified for “Crossover”.
■ Overlap
` No
` Yes
With this setting, a frequency band near the specified
crossover frequency is output by both tweeters and
woofers. Based on the frequency selected for “Crossover”,
the cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter (LPF) will be set
to 1/3 octave up and that of the high-pass filter (HPF) to
1/3 octave down. Example: With a “Crossover” of
“3200Hz”, the cutoff frequency of the woofers’ LPF will
be “4000Hz”, and the tweeters’ HPF will be “2500Hz”.

En-63

Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are
played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by
pressing MODE/D (Blue).

■ High Level, Low Level
`–6.0dB to 0.0dB to +6.0dB in 0.5 dB steps
With this setting, you can set the volume of tweeters and
woofers.
Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are
played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by
pressing MODE/D (Blue).

■ High Phase, Low Phase
`0º
`180º:
With this setting, you can adjust the phase of tweeters and
woofers.
Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are
played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by
pressing MODE/D (Blue).

Advanced Operations
■ High Distance, Low Distance
` 0inch(0.0cm) to 12inch(30.0cm) in 1 inch(2.5 cm)
steps
With this setting, you can adjust the virtual position of
tweeter and woofer units. Adjusting “High Distance”
virtually shifts woofers behind tweeters. Adjusting “Low
Distance” virtually shifts tweeters behind woofers.

Audio Adjust
1

Note

“Setup”

Dolby
Main Menu

Audio Adjust

With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.

Multiplex/Mono

Tweeter
Distance

Distance

Woofer

(Low Distance)

(High Distance)

Tip
• Sounds processed by Digital Processing Crossover Network are
played.
• You can switch from the current audio source to test noises by
pressing MODE/D (Blue).

• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 60), this setting
cannot be selected.

■ Multiplex
Input Channel
` Main
` Sub
` Main/Sub
This setting determines which channel of a stereo
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels
or languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
■ Mono
Input Channel
` Left + Right
` Left
` Right
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing
any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or 2channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening mode.
Output Speaker
` Center:
Mono audio is output by the center speaker.
` Left / Right:
Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
This setting determines which speakers output mono audio
when the Mono listening mode is selected.

En-64

■ PL IIx Music (2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro Logic
IIx.
Panorama
`On
`Off
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
Dimension
`–3 to 0 to +3
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or
backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field
backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to improve
the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image feels like it’s
in mono, or there’s not enough surround sound, move it
backward.

Advanced Operations
Center Width
` 0 to 3 to 7
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output from
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to the
front left and right speakers to create a phantom center).
This setting controls the front left, right, and center mix,
allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel
sound.
■ PL IIz Height Gain
` Low
` Mid
` High
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables
the listener to select how much gain is applied to the front
high speakers. There are three settings, “Low”, “Mid” and
“High”, and the front high speakers are accentuated in that
order. While “Mid” is the default listening setting, the
listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their
personal preference.
Note
• If the “Front High” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 60), this
setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2 is
turned on, this setting cannot be selected.

■ Dolby EX
` Auto:
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the
Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is
used.
` Manual:
You can select any available listening mode.
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are
handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround back

speakers are connected. This setting is effective with
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD only.
Note
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 60),
this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2/3” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2/3 is
turned on, this setting cannot be selected.

■ TrueHD Loudness Management
` Off
` On
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.

■ Volume Leveler
`Off
`Low:
Low Compression Mode activated.
`Mid:
Medium Compression Mode activated.
`High:
High Compression Mode activated. This setting
affects volume the most, causing all sounds to be of
equal loudness.
“Volume Leveler” maintains the perceived loudness of all
contents, coming from different channels or input sources.
Note

Note
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization
information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.

■ Dolby Volume
` Off
` On
Dolby Volume automatically adjusts the difference in
volume levels which can occur between different contents
or source components, freeing the user from having to
make volume adjustments. Also, by adjusting the
frequency balance according to the playback volume, it
recreates the original source audio. Dolby Volume
therefore provides comfortable listening, effectively
controlling the volume level difference without unnatural
changes in volume or sound quality to recreate the balance
and nuance of the source audio.
Note
• When the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “On”,
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” will be set to “Off”.
• If you would like to use Dolby Volume in THX listening modes,
set the “Loudness Plus” and “Preserve THX Settings” settings
to “Off” and “No”, respectively.
• When “Dolby Volume” is set to “On”, the Late Night function
cannot be set.

En-65

• If the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot
be selected.

■ Half Mode
`Off
`On
The Half Mode parameter turns Dolby Volume Half Mode
processing on and off.
In off mode, Dolby Volume applies a bass and treble
attenuation to the audio when the system gain exceeds
reference level. This enables a more perceptually flat
listening experience as human ears are more sensitive to
bass and treble at higher levels. Some listeners however,
prefer to have more bass and treble performance at higher
gain levels.
Note
• If the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot
be selected.
• During Half Mode on playback, Dolby Volume does not apply a
bass and treble attenuation when the system volume exceeds
reference level, thereby boosting perception of high and low
frequencies.

Advanced Operations
Dialogue Normalization
Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of
Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at the
same average listening level so the user does not have to
change the volume control between Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD programs. When
playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,
sometimes you may see a brief message in the front
panel display which will read “DialogNorm: X dB” (X
being a numeric value). The display is showing how the
program level relates with THX calibration level. If you
want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels,
you may wish to adjust the volume. For example, if you
see the following message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in
the front panel display, to keep the overall output level at
THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume
control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where
the playback loudness is preset, you can choose your
preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.

DTS
■ Neo:X Music
Center Image
` 0 to 2 to 5
The DTS Neo:X Music listening mode creates 9-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel.
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the sound
of the center channel to left and right (outwards).

Audyssey DSX®

LFE Level

■ Soundstage
` –3dB to Reference to +3dB
With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when using
Audyssey DSX.

■ Dolby Digital*1, DTS*2, Multich PCM, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD*3
`–QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low
Frequency Effects) channel individually for each input
sources.
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or
–Q dB.

Note
• This listening mode can be selected only when all the following
conditions are satisfied:
– The center speaker is connected.
– Either the front high or front wide speakers are connected.
– Powered Zone 2 is not in use.

*1
*2

Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources
DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources
DSD (Super Audio CD) sources

Theater-Dimensional

■ Listening Angle
` Wide:
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees.
` Narrow:
Select if the listening angle is less than 30 degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the TheaterDimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the
front left and right speakers relative to the listening
position. Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be
equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.

Sound Program Edit

Front left speaker

Front right speaker
Listening angle: 30°

Note
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20° and
“Wide” to 40°.

■ Sound Program
`Stereo Source 1, Stereo Source 2, Stereo Source 3,
Multich Source 1, Multich Source 2, Multich
Source 3
When playing back different content types on the same
source, or when listening to a single content type on
different sources, you can pre-register the settings that best
suit each content in “Sound Program”. The registered
settings can then be called up and modified in one set. Use
“Sound Program Edit” to register and modify a
combination of settings.
Tip
• To select the registered settings, see “Sound Program”
(➔ page 52).

■ Listening Mode
You can assign a default listening mode that will be
selected automatically when you select the sound program.
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening mode
selected last will be used.
To be continued

En-66

Advanced Operations
The “Straight Decode” option means that straight
decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is
selected.
■ Subwoofer
` No, Yes
You can choose whether or not to use the subwoofer with
the sound program.
■ Music Optimizer*1
` Off, On
See “Music Optimizer” (➔ page 53).
■ Equalizer*1
` Off
` Manual:
The manual setting in “Equalizer Settings”
(➔ page 62) is applied.
■ Audyssey*1
` Off, Movie, Music
See “Audyssey” (➔ page 53).
■ Dynamic EQ*1*2
` Off, On
See “Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 53).
■ Dynamic Volume*1*2
` Off, Light, Medium, Heavy
See “Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 53).
■ Dolby
` Off, On
See “Dolby Volume” (➔ page 53).
Volume*1

Note
• You cannot select the “Subwoofer” setting if you set it to “No”
in “Speaker Configuration”.
• “Music Optimizer” is only available when “Stereo Source 1”,
“Stereo Source 2” or “Stereo Source 3” is selected.
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for measurement,
the “Audyssey”setting cannot be selected.

*1
*2

This setting cannot be used when the “Listening Mode”
setting is set to “Pure Audio” or “Direct”.
To enable this setting, you must first perform the Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.

Source Setup
1

Main Menu

“Setup”

Source Setup

Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Preparation
Press the input selector buttons to select an input source.

Audyssey®
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 Room Correction and
Speaker Setup. To enable the following settings, you
must first perform the Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (➔ page 37).
• These technologies cannot be used when:
– a pair of headphones is connected, or
– either Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected.
■ Audyssey
` Off
` Movie:
Select this setting for movie material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
` Music:
Select this setting for music material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for measurement,
“Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.

En-67

■ Dynamic EQ
`Off
`On:
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® becomes active.
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great sound
even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating
sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into
account human perception and room acoustics. It does so
by selecting the correct frequency response and surround
volume levels moment-by-moment so that the content
sounds the way it was created at any volume level — not
just at reference level.
■ Reference Level
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
`0dB:
This should be selected for movie contents.
`5dB:
Select this setting for content that has a very wide
dynamic range, such as classical music.
`10dB:
Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a
wider dynamic range. This setting should also be
selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at
10 dB below film reference.
`15dB:
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other
program material that is mixed at very high listening
levels and has a compressed dynamic range.
To be continued

Advanced Operations
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference.
To achieve the same reference level in a home theater
system each speaker level must be adjusted so that
–30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise
produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening
position. A home theater system automatically calibrated
by Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 will play at reference level
when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB position.
At that level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film
mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference
response and surround envelopment when the volume is
turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is
not always used in music or other non-film content.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides
three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB,
and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the
content is not within the standard.
Note
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology cannot
be used.

■ Dynamic Volume
` Off
` Light:
Activates Light Compression Mode.
` Medium:
Activates Medium Compression Mode.
` Heavy:
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This setting
affects volume the most. It quiets the loud parts, such
as explosions, and boosts the quiet parts so they can
be heard.
Note

• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is
automatically switched to “Off”.

About Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at any
user-selected volume setting. The result is bass response,
tonal balance and surround impression that remain
constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ
combines information from incoming source levels with
actual output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for
delivering a loudness correction solution.

IntelliVolume
■ IntelliVolume
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Use e/r to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use e
to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably quieter, use r to
increase its input level.
Note
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.

A/V Sync
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large
variations in volume level between television programs,
commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of
movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume
setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of
program material is being perceived by listeners in real
time to decide whether an adjustment is needed.
Whenever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the
necessary rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the
desired playback volume level while optimizing the
dynamic range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
between television channels or changing from stereo to
surround sound content.

• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set the
“Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve THX
Settings” to “No” (➔ page 62).
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set to
“On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.

En-68

■ A/V Sync
`0msec to 800msec in 5 msec steps
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and sound
are out of sync. With this setting, you can correct this by
delaying the audio signals.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
ENTER.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
The range of values you can adjust will depend on whether
your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync and if the
“Lip Sync” setting is set to “On” or not (➔ page 76).
Note
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio or Direct listening
mode is used with an analog input source.
• This setting cannot be used with the NET input selector.

Advanced Operations

Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
entered, the custom name will appear on the display.
The custom name is edited using the keyboard screen.
■ Name

Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then
press ENTER.
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.

To store a name when you’re done, be sure to
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press
ENTER.

Space:
Enters a space character.
Shift*1:
Toggles between lower and upper case characters.
(Left)/ (Right):
Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input
area.
Back Space*2:
Moves the cursor backward and deletes one
character.
OK:
Confirms your entry.

4-4. Name Edit

Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture quality
and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.
To view the TV picture while setting, press ENTER. To
return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
■ Wide Mode*1*2
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
`4:3:

Tip
*1

Name input area

Picture Adjust

This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote
controller.
Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the
characters you have input.

`Full:

BD/DVD

Name

a
n

b
o

1
,

2
.

c
p

d
q

e
r

f
s

g
t

h
u

i
v

j
w

k
x

3
4
/
;
Shift

5
:

6
@

7
[

8
9
0
–
^
]
Space
OK
Back Space

Shift

+10

l
y

CLR

m
z
\

Tip
• To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM, and
then select the preset (➔ page 34).
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with CLR,
select “OK” and then press ENTER.

`Zoom:

All Erase

Note
• This setting cannot be used for the NET and USB input selectors.
A
N
!
<

B
O
˝
>

C
P
#
?

Shift
+10

Shift

D
Q
$
+

E
R
%

F
S
&
`

G
T
’
{

H
U
(

I
V
)

J
W
_

K
X
=

L
Y
˜

M
Z
|

`Wide Zoom:

}
Space
OK
Back Space

CLR

All Erase

`Auto:
According to the input signals and monitor output
setting, the AV receiver automatically selects the
“4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom” mode. See
“Monitor Out” for details on the monitor output
setting (➔ page 57).

En-69

Advanced Operations
■ Picture Mode*1*3
` Custom:
All settings can be performed manually.
` ISF Day:
Select when the room is bright.
` ISF Night:
Select when the room is dark.
` Cinema:
Select when the picture source is a movie or alike.
` Game:
Select when the video source is a game console.
` Streaming:
Attempts to reduce the mosquito noise and block
artifact effects.
` Through:
Does not adjust picture quality (changes resolution).
` Direct:
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change
resolution). The video coming from an analog input
and output by the HDMI output is processed in the
same way as “Through”.
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one
operation; “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Mosquito NR”,
“Random NR”, “Block NR”, “Resolution”,
“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation”, “Color
Temperature”, “Gamma”, “Red Brightness”, “Red
Contrast”, “Green Brightness”, “Green Contrast”,
“Blue Brightness” or “Blue Contrast”.
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and
calibration standards established by the Imaging Science
Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully crafted,
industry-recognized standards for optimal video
performance and has implemented a training program for
technicians and installers to use these standards to obtain
optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accordingly,
Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration be
performed by an ISF Certified installation technician.

■ Game Mode*4*5*6
` Off
` On
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video
component (i.e., game console), select the corresponding
input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”.
The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality will
become poor.
■ Film Mode*4*6
` Video:
“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the input
signal is handled as a video source.
` Auto:
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate conversion is
applied.
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,
automatically converting it to the appropriate progressive
signal and reproducing the natural quality of the original
picture.
■ Edge Enhancement*4*6
` Off
` Low
` Mid
` High
With this setting, you can make the picture appear sharper.
■ Noise Reduction*4*6
` Off
` Low
` Mid
` High
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on the
screen. Select the desired level.

En-70

■ Mosquito NR*4*6*7
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue with
overly compressed MPEG content.
■ Random NR*4*6*7
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove
indiscriminate picture noise, such as film grain.
■ Block NR*4*6*7
`Off
`Low
`Mid
`High
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG
content.

Advanced Operations
■ Resolution*4*6*8
` Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at
the same resolution and with no conversion.
` Auto:
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your TV.
` 480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p:
Select the desired output resolution.
` 1080p/24:
Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
` 4K Upscaling:
Select this for an output resolution four times that of
1080p. Depending on the resolution supported by
your TV, it will result in either 3840 × 2160 or 4096
× 2160 pixels.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output
and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution
as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
This setting is available only when “Source” has been
selected in “Resolution” of the “Monitor Out” setting
(➔ page 57).
■ Brightness*1*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the picture brightness.
“–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Contrast*1*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the
least. “+50” is the greatest.
■ Hue*1*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue between
“–50” and “+50”.
■ Saturation*1*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50

With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the
weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
■ Color Temperature*4*6
` Warm
` Normal
` Cool
With this setting, you can adjust the color temperature.
■ Gamma*4*6
` –3 to 0 to +3
With this setting, you can adjust the incoming picture’s R
(red), G (green), and B (blue) color signal in relation to the
output color signal.
■ Red Brightness*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of red color.
“–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Red Contrast*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of red color.
“–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
■ Green Brightness*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of green
color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Green Contrast*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the contrast of green color.
“–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
■ Blue Brightness*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50
With this setting you can adjust the brightness of blue
color. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
■ Blue Contrast*4*6
` –50 to 0 to +50

En-71

With this setting you can adjust the contrast of blue color.
“–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Note
• “Picture Adjust” cannot be used when:
– The NET input selector is selected, or
– “Monitor Out” is set to “Sub” (➔ pages 57).
*1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller
by using the Quick Setup (➔ page 51).
*2 When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to
“Full”.
*3 When “Metadata Compatible” is enabled (➔ page 62),
“Picture Mode” is fixed to “Direct”.
*4 When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other than
“Custom”, this setting cannot be used.
*5 If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K Upscaling”
(➔ pages 57, 71), this setting is fixed at “Off”.
*6 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.
*7 When the “Noise Reduction” setting is set to anything other
than “Off”, this setting cannot be selected.
*8 With some TVs, there may be no picture when this setting is
set to “4K Upscaling”.

Advanced Operations

Audio Selector
■ Audio Selector
` ARC:
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to
HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.*1
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be
automatically selected as a priority among other
assignments.
` HDMI:
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI (HDMI
IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or
OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI input is
automatically selected as a priority.
` COAXIAL:
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both coaxial and
HDMI inputs have been assigned, coaxial input is
automatically selected as a priority.
` OPTICAL:
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both optical and HDMI
inputs have been assigned, optical input is
automatically selected as a priority.
` Analog:
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.
You can set priorities of audio output when there are both
digital and analog inputs.
Note

Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
Mode)
■ Fixed Mode
` Off:
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
` PCM:
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be produced.
` DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the dts
indicator will flash and there will be no sound.
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify the
signal type in “Fixed Mode”.
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format
automatically. However, if you experience either of the
following issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you
can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off,
try setting the format to PCM.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a
DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
Note

Listening Mode Preset
1

Main Menu

“Setup”

Listening Mode Preset

You can assign a default listening mode to each input
source that will be selected automatically when you select
each input source. For example, you can set the default
listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals.
You can select other listening modes during playback, but
the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV
receiver has been set to standby.

Use q/w to select the input source that you want to
set, and then press ENTER.
The following menu appears.

5-1. Listening Mode Preset
Analog/PCM
Mono/Multiplex Source
2ch Source
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Other Multich Source

BD/DVD
Last Valid e r
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid

Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.

To be continued

• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the setting in
“Audio Selector”.

• This setting can be made only for an input source that is assigned
to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.
• This setting cannot be used with the NET and USB input
selectors.
• When using the Whole House Mode, “Audio Selector” is fixed
to “Analog”.
• With the GAME2 input selector, “Analog” cannot be used.
*1 You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input selector.
But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the “Audio Return
Channel” setting (➔ page 76).

En-72

Advanced Operations

Use q/w to select the signal format that you want to
set, and then use e/r to select a listening mode.
Only listening modes that can be used with each input
signal format can be selected (➔ pages 40 to 46).
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that straight
decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) is
selected.
Note
• For the “TUNER” input selector, only “Analog” will be
available.
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, only “Digital” will
be available.

■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).
Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via
HDMI).
■ Other Multich Source
Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel
PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and
DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.

■ Analog/PCM/Digital
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, turntable,
radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digital (CD,
DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.

Miscellaneous
1

Main Menu

“Setup”

Miscellaneous

Volume Setup
■ Volume Display
`Absolute:
Displayed range is Min, 0.5 to 99.5, Max.
`Relative(THX):
Displayed range is –QdB, –81.5dB to +18.0dB.
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is
displayed.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
Note
• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82.0Ref” will appear on the
display and the THX indicator will flash.

Note
• For the “GAME2” input selector, only “PCM” is available.

■ Muting Level
`–QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB steps.
This setting determines how much the output is muted when
the muting function is used (➔ page 49).

■ Mono/Multiplex Source
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when a mono digital audio signal is played (DVD,
etc.).

■ Maximum Volume
`Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
`Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.

■ 2ch Source
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources, such as
Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.
■ Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.). Specifies
the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,
such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).

En-73

Advanced Operations
■ Power On Volume
` Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
` Last, –QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)
With this preference, you can specify the volume setting to
be used each time the AV receiver is turned on.
To use the same volume level that was used when the AV
receiver was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher than
the “Maximum Volume” setting.
■ Headphone Level
` –12dB to 0dB to +12dB
With this setting, you can specify the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s a
volume difference between your speakers and your
headphones.

OSD Setup

Hardware Setup

■ On Screen Display
` On
` Off
This preference determines whether operation details are
displayed on-screen when an AV receiver function is
adjusted.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be
output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN.
■ Language
(North American models)
` English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska
(European, Australian and Asian models)
` English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska, 中文
This setting determines the language used for the on-screen
menus.
■ Screen Saver
` 3min, 5min, 10min
` Off
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen saver
activates itself. Once active, the screen saver will go off
and the screen will return to its previous state if the AV
receiver is operated in any way.

En-74

Main Menu

“Setup”

Hardware Setup

Tuner
■ AM/FM Frequency Step (North American
models)
`10kHz/200kHz:
`9kHz/50kHz:
Select the frequency step according to your area.
■ AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and
Asian models)
`10kHz:
`9kHz:
Select the frequency step according to your area.
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM/FM frequency step used in your area.
Note
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted.

Advanced Operations

HDMI
■ HDMI Control(RIHD)
` Off
` On
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by the
AV receiver (➔ page 104).
Note
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the names
of connected p-compatible components and “RIHD On”
are displayed on the AV receiver.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component,
it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc. (“*” shows up
and indicates the number of components, when two or more are
received).
• When an p-compatible component is connected to the
AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the connected
component is displayed on the AV receiver display. For example,
while you are watching TV broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player (being powered on) with the remote control of
the AV receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will
be displayed on the AV receiver.
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible
or not.
• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the setting to
“Off”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• When the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter standby
mode as usual.)
• The p control does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use
HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
• When the source equipment is connected with the u
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is
set to “On”.

■ HDMI Through
` Off
` BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME1, GAME2,
PC, AUX, TV/CD, PHONO:
Selects the input source for which the HDMI
Through function is enabled.
` Last:
The HDMI Through function is activated on the input
source selected at the time of setting the AV receiver
to standby mode.
When enabling the HDMI Through function, regardless of
whether the AV receiver is on or in standby, both audio
and video streams from an HDMI input will be output to
the TV or other components via HDMI connection. The
HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit in standby mode. Note
that the indicator may not light under certain conditions
(➔ page 56).
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the
above “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,
resulting in automatic input source selection.
Note
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via “HDMI Input”
setting is enabled (➔ page 58).
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase during the
HDMI Through function; however in the following cases, the
power consumption can be saved:
– The TV is in standby mode.
– You are watching a TV program.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input source
may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.

En-75

■ Audio TV Out
`Off
`On
This preference determines whether the incoming audio
signal is output from the HDMI output. You may want to
turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the
HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a
connected component through your TV’s speakers.
Normally, this should be set to “Off”.
Note
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, the
AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. In this
case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s display by
pressing DISPLAY.
• When “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is
fixed to “Auto”.
• When Digital Processing Crossover Network is being used, this
setting is not available.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even
when this setting is set to “On”.
• When “Audio TV Out” or “HDMI Control(RIHD)” is set to
“On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers
(➔ page 19), turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will
make the sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and
right speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn
down the AV receiver’s volume.
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to
“On” and the input source is not HDMI.

Advanced Operations
■ Audio Return Channel (ARC)
` Off
` Auto:
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to
HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an ARC
capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI OUT MAIN
of the AV receiver. To use this function, you must select
the TV/CD input selector and your TV must be ARC
capable. Default setting: “- - - -”
Note
• This setting is fixed to “- - - -” when the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be
automatically switched to “ARC” (➔ page 72).

After changing the settings of the “HDMI
Control(RIHD)”, “HDMI Through” or “Audio
Return Channel”, turn off the power on all connected
pieces of equipment and then turn them on again. Refer
to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces of
equipment.
■ Lip Sync
` Off
` On
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically
correct any delay between the video and the audio, based
on the data from the connected monitor.
Note
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports
HDMI Lip Sync.

■ InstaPrevue
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home menu
(➔ page 47) and specify the preview display of HDMI
video streams.

Sub Window
` Multi:
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.
` Single:
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.
With this setting, you can set the number of preview
thumbnails displayed.
Position
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)
` Top, Bottom, Left, Right
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)
` Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower Right
With this setting, you can set the position of preview
thumbnails on the TV screen.
Note
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be properly
rendered on the preview thumbnails of InstaPrevue.

Auto Standby
■ Auto Standby
` Off
` On
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the AV receiver
will automatically enter standby mode if there is no
operation for 30 minutes with no audio and no video signal
input.
“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s display
and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on.
Default setting: On (European, Australian and Asian
models), Off (North American models)
Note
• Set to “On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself during
playback with some sources.
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is on.

En-76

Network
After modifying the network settings, you must confirm
the changes by executing “Save”.
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need to
change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set to
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default (i.e.,
DHCP is set to “Enable”). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled (you’re for example using static
IP), you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, in
which case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
essential.
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used by
routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices to
automatically configure themselves on a network.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses DNS
to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
■ MAC Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.

Advanced Operations
■ DHCP
` Enable
` Disable
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Note
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP Address”,
“Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server” settings
yourself.

■ IP Address
` Class A:
“10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”
` Class B:
“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”
` Class C:
“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet Service
Provider (ISP).
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically 255.255.255.0).
■ Gateway
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
■ DNS Server
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.
■ Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
■ Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
■ Network Standby
` On
` Off

This setting enables or disables control over the network.
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit while
the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that the indicator
may not light under certain conditions (➔ page 56).
Note

Note
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change
the remote controller to the same ID (see below), otherwise, you
won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.

Changing the remote controller’s ID

• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly increases in
standby mode.

■ Update Notice
` Enable
` Disable
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a
firmware update via network is available.

While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
down Q SETUP until the RECEIVER lights (about
3 seconds).

Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
RECEIVER flashes twice.

Remote Mode Setup

Note
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window will
switch this setting to “Disable” (➔ page 23).
• For details on the update notification, see “If the “Firmware
Update Available” window appears.” (➔ page 23).

See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 84).

Lock Setup

Initial Setup
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.
See “Initial Setup” (➔ page 24).

Main Menu

“Setup”

Remote Controller Setup

Remote ID
■ Remote ID
` 1, 2, or 3
When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate
the AV receiver from other components, you can change
its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.

En-77

Main Menu

“Setup”

Lock Setup

With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.

Remote Controller Setup
1

■ Setup
`Locked
`Unlocked
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be
locked and you cannot change any setting.

Advanced Operations

Multi Zone

Note

Main room

In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy
playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And,
you can select a different source for each room.

• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2/3 is controlled by the AV
receiver.
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is
reduced to 5.1 channels.
• When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main room is
reduced to 3.1 channels.

Making Multi Zone Connections

AV receiver

12V Trigger Out

There are two ways you can connect Zone speakers:
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
2. Connect them to an additional amplifier.

When Zone 2/3 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT jack goes high (+12 V and max. 150 mA
for Zone 2, +12 V and max. 25 mA for Zone 3).
Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input on a
component in Zone 2/3 will make that component turn on
or off as the AV receiver turns on or off the Zone 2/3.

Connecting Your Zone Speakers Directly to
the AV receiver
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main
room and Zone 2/3. This is called Powered Zone, as the
Zone 2/3 speakers are powered by the AV receiver.
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered
Zone 2/3 setting (➔ page 59).

Zone 2
R

Main room

AV receiver

Zone 3
R

En-78

Advanced Operations

Connecting the Zone Speakers to an
Additional Amplifier
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main
listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2/3.

Controlling Multi Zone Components

■ Operating on the AV receiver
Input selector buttons

Tip

MASTER VOLUME

Main room

To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3.
The Z2/Z3 indicator on the AV receiver’s display
flashes. Press OFF.
The zone is turned off.
• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).

■ Operating on the remote controller
To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE on the remote
controller first.
ZONE turns red when Zone 2 is on, and green when
Zone 3 is on.

AV receiver

ZONE 3
ZONE 2
OFF

8RECEIVER
ZONE

Tip
• The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of main
room with Multi Zone (➔ page 49).

Zone 2
IN
R

Receiver/
integrated amp

To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input
selector button within 8 seconds.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the
AV receiver’s display.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).

Zone 3

To select AM or FM, press TUNER input selector and
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 repeatedly.
IN
R

Receiver/
integrated amp

Input selector buttons

To select the same source as the main room’s, press
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Zone 2 Selector:
Source” or “Zone 3 Selector: Source” appears on the
AV receiver’s display.

MUTING
VOLq/w

Press ZONE repeatedly, then point the remote
controller at the AV receiver and press
8RECEIVER.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on the
AV receiver’s display.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes high (+12 V).

To be continued

Note
• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.

En-79

Advanced Operations

To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press ZONE
repeatedly, followed by an INPUT SELECTOR
button.
To select AM or FM, press the TUNER input selector
and ZONE repeatedly.
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly,
followed by 8RECEIVER.
The zone is turned off.
Tip
• The corresponding trigger output goes low (0 volts).

Adjusting the Volume for Zones
■ Operating on the remote controller

1
2

Press ZONE repeatedly.
Use VOL q/w.

■ Operating on the AV receiver

Press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 (the Z2/Z3 indicator on
the AV receiver’s display flashes).

Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8 seconds.

If your Zone 2/3 speakers are connected to a receiver or
integrated amplifier in Zone 2/3, use its volume control to
adjust the volume.

Muting Zones
■ Operating on the remote controller

Press ZONE repeatedly, and then press MUTING.

Tip
• To unmute, press ZONE followed by MUTING again. Zones can
also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
Note
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2/3 LINE
OUT and FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R, FRONT
HIGH/ZONE 3 L/R terminals. Digital input sources are not
output. If no sound is heard when an input source is selected,
verify that the source is connected to an analog input.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your
main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station will be
heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an FM station
for the main room, that station will also be output in Zone 2/3.
• When you have selected NET or USB as input selector, the last
selector selected will be set for Main room and Zone 2/3.
• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is selected, the
power consumption of standby mode slightly increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, u functions will not work.
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone 2/3 is
active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.
• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode is set
to Pure Audio will automatically switch it to Direct.
• “GAME2” cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 2/3.
• When “GAME2” is the input source of Main room and Zone 2/3
is set to share the same source, no sound will be output from
Zone 2/3.
• Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s ZONE to
select zones, the last zone selection will be retained once you
have switched to other components by pressing other REMOTE
MODE after pressing ZONE.

En-80

Advanced Operations

Using the Remote Controller in
Zone and Multiroom Control Kits

Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components

From the connecting block

To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone, you’ll need a commercially available
multiroom remote control kit for each zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line of
sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when it’s
installed inside a cabinet.

Miniplug cable

In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through to
the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up
by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not output.

AV receiver
Signal flow

Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone picks up the infrared
signals from the remote controller and feeds them through
to the AV receiver in the main room via the connecting
block.

Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.

IR IN
IR OUT

IR receiver

Connecting
block
AV receiver
IR Emitter

Remote controller

IR IN

Other component
Connecting
block

IR
receiver

Connecting
block

IR
receiver

IR IN

The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.

Remote controller
Main room

Zone

Signal flow

From the connecting block

Inside
cabinet

Remote controller

Miniplug cable
Other component

Signal flow
Remote control sensor

The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
below.

AV receiver
Emitter

Miniplug
IR Emitter
Signal flow

En-81

Controlling Other Components

iPod/iPhone Playback
via Onkyo Dock
Using the Onkyo Dock
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are different
depending on the region.
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock
components, see the Onkyo web site at:
http://www.onkyo.com
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available
from the Apple web site.
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the instruction
manual of the Onkyo Dock.

RI Dock
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of your
iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and videos of your
iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the on-screen display
(OSD) allows you to view, navigate, and select your
iPod/iPhone model’s contents on your TV, and with the
supplied remote controller, you can control your
iPod/iPhone from the comfort of your sofa. You can even
use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate your
iPod/iPhone.
Note
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV
receiver’s remote controller for the first time (➔ page 85).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an u cable
(➔ page 21).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ page 48).

■ System Function

Other Remote Operations
You can use the remote controller that came with the AV
receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions. The
available functionality depends on the AV receiver.
Note
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI
Dock.

iPod Alarm
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified time
and select your iPod as the input source automatically.
Note
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being played
or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in sound (Beep).
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which music
files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.

■ Operating Notes

Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,
some of the linked operations may not be available.
System On
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when RI
Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can be
turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.
Auto Power On
If you press the remote controller’s 1 (Playback) while
the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver will
automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as the input
source, and your iPod/iPhone will start playback.
Direct Change
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to another
input source, the AV receiver will automatically switch to
the input to which the RI Dock is connected.

En-82

• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback
volume.
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its volume
control has no effect.
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone while
it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set too loud
before you reconnect your headphones.

Controlling Other Components
■ u Dock operation

Controlling Your iPod/iPhone

Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.

By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your Dock,
you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock with the
buttons described further in this section.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on
entering a remote control code (➔ page 85).
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.

Available buttons
e DISPLAY*2

b q/w/e/r, ENTER

f 8SOURCE*3

PLAYLIST e/r

e
f

RI Dock
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
• 8SOURCE may not work with a remote control code
(without u). In this case, make an u connection and
enter the remote control code 81993 (with u).
■ With the RI Control
Make an u connection and enter the remote control code
81993 (with u).
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 48).

a TOP MENU*1

g
h
i
a

■ Without the RI Control
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first
(➔ page 86).

c
d

En-83

g MUTING

c 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

h ALBUM +/–

d REPEAT
RANDOM

j MENU
k MODE*4

i VOL q/w

• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,
certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the
instruction manual of the RI Dock.
*1 TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with the
DS-A2 RI Dock.
*2 DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.
*3 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X RI
Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not respond the
first time you press this button, in which case you should press
it again. This is because the remote controller transmits the On
and Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is
already on, it will remain on when the remote controller
transmits the On command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is
already off, it will remain off when the remote controller
transmits the Off command.
*4 Resume mode
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of the
song that was playing when you removed your iPod/iPhone
from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.

Controlling Other Components

Controlling Other
Components
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control
your other AV components. This section explains how to
enter the remote control code for a component that you
want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.
See “Learning Commands” for learning commands
directly from another component’s remote controller
(➔ page 89).
See “Using Normal Macros” for programming
ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control
actions (➔ page 90).

Looking up for Remote Control Codes
You can look up for an appropriate remote control code
from the on-screen menu.
You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output
(HDMI OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen
setting.

1
2
3

Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.

Use q/w to select “Remote Mode Setup”, and then
press ENTER.

The following REMOTE MODE buttons are
preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling
the components listed. You do not need to enter a remote
control code to control these components.
For details on controlling these components, see the
indicated pages.

Use q/w to select a remote mode, and then press
ENTER.
The menu of category selection appears.

Use q/w to select a category, and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.

BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ page 87)
TV/CD
Onkyo CD player (➔ page 86)
STB/DVR Apple TV

Use q/w/e/r to select a character, and then press
ENTER.
Repeat this step for the first three characters of the
brand name.
When you have entered the 3rd character, select
“Search” and press ENTER.
A list of brand names is retrieved.
If the desired brand name is not found:
Use r to select “Not Listed”, and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen for brand name input appears.

Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes

Use e/r to select “Setup”, and then press ENTER.
Use q/w to select “Remote Controller Setup”, and
then press ENTER.

En-84

Use q/w to select a brand, and then press ENTER.
A remote control code with its instructions are
displayed. Follow the procedure.

If you can control the component, use q/w to select
“OK”, and then press ENTER.
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote Mode
Setup” front screen.
If you cannot control the component, use q/w to
select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.
The next code is displayed.

Controlling Other Components

Entering Remote Control Codes

Remapping Colored Buttons

You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you
want to control.

You can change the configuration of colored buttons, with
which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.

Look up the appropriate remote control code in the
separate Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
player, TV, etc.).

While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to
which you want to assign a code, press and hold
down DISPLAY (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button lights.

While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
that you want to program, press and hold down A
(Red) until the REMOTE MODE button lights
(about 3 seconds).
You can only change colored buttons for components
whose codes belong to categories of the Remote
Control Codes list (BD/DVD player, TV, cable set-top
box, etc).

Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons in the
order that you want to reassign them.
The button presses are assigned to each button from
left to right. The REMOTE MODE button flashes
twice, indicating that the sequence has been
successfully assigned. If the sequence is not
successfully assigned, the REMOTE MODE button
will flash once slowly.

Note
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER
and the multi zone button.
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,
remote control codes from any category can be assigned for
the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also
work as input selector buttons (➔ page 26), so choose a
REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input to
which you connect your component. For example, if you
connect your CD player to the CD input, choose TV/CD
when entering its remote control code.

Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter
the 5-digit remote control code.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully,
the REMOTE MODE button will flash once slowly.

Tip
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default settings,
see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons” (➔ page 86).
Note
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the
operation will be cancelled.
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in
Receiver mode or when ZONE 2/3 is active.

Note
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time
of release, they are subject to change.

En-85

Controlling Other Components
` 71323:
Onkyo CD recorder without u
` 82990:
Onkyo Dock without u

Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via RI
Onkyo components that are connected via u are
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.

1
2

Make sure the Onkyo component is connected with
an u cable and an analog audio cable (RCA).
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for details
(➔ page 21).
Enter the appropriate remote control code for a
REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the
previous section.
`42157:
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u
`81993:
Onkyo Dock with u

Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.

1
2

Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and operate
the component.

Controlling Onkyo components without u
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the
remote controller directly at it, or you want to control an
Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use the
following remote control codes:
` 30627:
Onkyo DVD player without u
` 71817:
Onkyo CD player without u
` 32900/33100/33500:
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player
` 32901/33104/33504:
Onkyo HD DVD player
` 70868:
Onkyo MD recorder without u

While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
that you want to reset, press and hold down HOME
until the REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3
seconds).
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE
button again.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been reset.
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed
with a remote control code. When a button is reset, its
preprogrammed code is restored.
Note

Controlling Other Components
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
component, you can control your component as described
below.
For details on entering a remote control code for other
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 85).

Controlling a TV
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for
controlling a TV that supports the p*1 (limited to
some models). The TV must be able to receive remote
control commands via p and be connected to the
AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling your TV via
p doesn’t work very well, program your TV’s
remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode
to control your TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
`11807/13100/13500:
TV with p

• The learning command is also reset.

Controlling Apple TV

Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.

While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
down HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3
seconds).

Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
RECEIVER flashes twice, indicating that the remote
controller has been reset.

En-86

By programming the supplied remote controller with the
appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate
your Apple TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
`02615:
Apple TV

Controlling Other Components
■ TV operation

Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.

By programming the supplied remote controller with the
appropriate remote control code, you can use it to operate
your MHL-enabled mobile device.
Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX
INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the remote
control code on the AUX button.
Use the following remote control codes:
(North American models)
` 33101:
MHL-enabled mobile device
(European, Australian, and Asian models)
` 32910:
MHL-enabled mobile device
Note
• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be
guaranteed.

Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD
DVD Player or DVD Recorder
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code
for controlling a component that supports the p*1
(limited to some models). The component must be able to
receive remote control commands via p and be
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI.
Use the following remote control codes:
` 32910/33101/33501/31612:
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p

Available buttons
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w
b GUIDE

h
i

Number: +10*1

c q/w/e/r
ENTER

h DISPLAY
j MUTING

d SETUP

k CH +/–
l PREV CH

e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6*1
f A (Red)*1
B (Green)*1

m RETURN
n CLR

C (Yellow)*1

j
k

D (Blue)*1

■ Blu-ray Disc/HD DVD player operation
Available buttons
b TOP MENU

c
d

c q/w/e/r
ENTER

The p supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system
control function of the HDMI standard.

g
n

En-87

g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1
h DISPLAY

d SETUP

i 8SOURCE

e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

j MUTING
k CH +/–

f A (Red)
B (Green)

f
*1

g Number: 1 to 9, 0

DISC +/–

C (Yellow)

l MENU
m RETURN

D (Blue)

n CLR

Controlling Other Components
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.

■ DVD player/DVD recorder operation

■ Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation

Available buttons

b TOP MENU

g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1

c q/w/e/r
ENTER

h
i

k
b

c
d

g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10

h DISPLAY

c q/w/e/r
ENTER

d SETUP

i 8SOURCE

d SETUP

i 8SOURCE

e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

j MUTING
k CH +/–

e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

j MUTING
k CH +/–

f A (Red)
B (Green)

l PREV CH
m RETURN

DISC +/–

f A (Red)*1
B (Green)

b GUIDE

C (Yellow)*1

l MENU
m RETURN

D (Blue)*1

n CLR

C (Yellow)

h DISPLAY

n CLR

D (Blue)

■ CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation

■ VCR/PVR operation

Available buttons

Available buttons
b GUIDE

h DISPLAY

c q/w/e/r
ENTER

i 8SOURCE

d SETUP

j MUTING
k CH +/–

e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

l PREV CH
m RETURN

g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10

n CLR

c q/w/e/r
ENTER

g Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10

d SETUP

h DISPLAY

e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

i 8SOURCE

f SEARCH
REPEAT

j MUTING
k DISC +/–
n CLR

RANDOM

■ Cassette tape deck operation

Available buttons

e 1, t (Reverse
Playback), 2, 5, 4,
7, 6

MODE
Note

i 8SOURCE
j MUTING

g
n

En-88

• With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of
iPod/iPhone (➔ page 83).
*1 The p function is not supported. The p
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control
function of the HDMI standard.

Controlling Other Components
• When the remote controller runs out of batteries, all commands
acquired will be lost and will have to be learned all over again.
Therefore, do not discard your other remote controllers.

If the command is learned successfully, the
REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.

Learning Commands

O
N

D
DV
U
O
R

D
-1

G
-2
EO
VID
EO

LE R
SE E
T UN
PU T
IN
PE

W
PO

D
DV

VID

R O
TO H
C P
ER
M

RE
SUOD
M

Within about
4 inches (10 cm)

H
I-CT
ULTPU
M IN

S
ER E
N PR

STE
TEON
T

TIN

The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the
commands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s remote
controller, the supplied remote controller can learn it and
then reproduce the exact same command when its 1 is
pressed in CD remote mode.
This is useful when some buttons don’t work as expected
though you entered the appropriate remote control code
(➔ page 85).

Supplied remote
controller

8RECEIVER

4
REMOTE
MODE

To learn more commands, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button when you’ve
finished. The REMOTE MODE button flashes
twice.

Note

While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
for the mode in which you want to use the
command, press and hold down 8RECEIVER
until the REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3
seconds).

On the supplied remote controller, press the
button to which you want to assign the new
command.

Point the remote controllers at each other, within
about 4 inches (10 cm) apart, and then press and
hold the button whose command you want to
acquire until the REMOTE MODE button flashes.

• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
8RECEIVER, ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC,
REMOTE MODE, MODE.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90
commands, although this will be less if commands that use a lot
of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, and Pause are
preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo CD
players, cassette decks, and DVD players. However, they can
learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed
commands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(➔ page 86).
• To overwrite a previously acquired command, repeat this
procedure.
• Depending on the remote controller used, some buttons may not
respond as expected, or the learning process itself may not be
possible.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be
acquired.

En-89

■ Deleting Acquired Commands
1. While holding down the REMOTE MODE button for
the mode from which you want to delete a command,
press and hold down 8TV until the REMOTE MODE
button lights (about 3 seconds).
2. Press the REMOTE MODE button or the button from
which you want to delete the command.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
When you press the REMOTE MODE button, all
commands learned in that mode will be deleted.

Controlling Other Components

Using Normal Macros
You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES to
perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the following
actions:
1. Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote
controller mode.
2. Press 8RECEIVER to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press TV/CD to select the TV/CD input source.
4. Press 1 to start playback on the CD player.
You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions are
performed with just one button press.

When you’ve finished, press ACTIVITIES again.
ACTIVITIES button flashes twice.
If you enter 32 commands, the process will finish
automatically.

Note
• MODE cannot be operated during the macro-making process.
• Once you assign new macro commands, the previously registered
macro will no longer work. If you wish to retrieve it, you will
have to reassign the commands with the macro-making.

Running Macros

Making Macros
Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro, and each macro
can contain up to 32 commands.

Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in the
order in which they were programmed. Keep the
remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the
current remote controller mode.

Deleting Macros
ALL OFF

MY MOVIE,
MY TV,
MY MUSIC

RECEIVER

1
2

While holding down HOME, press and hold down
ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds).
Press ALL OFF again.
ALL OFF flashes twice.

Note

1
2

While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC until
MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC lights (about
3 seconds).
Press the buttons whose actions you want to
program into the macro in the order you want
them performed.
For the CD example above, you would press the
following buttons: 8RECEIVER, TV/CD, 1.

• When Normal macros are deleted, ACTIVITIES are restored to
their default settings, namely the Easy macro commands
(➔ page 50).
• When using Normal macros, Easy macros cannot be used, which
includes changing the source components.

En-90

Appendix

Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter
standby mode.

The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.

■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged
into the wall outlet.

—

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five —
seconds or more, then plug it in again.

■ The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the
power, it turns off again
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the 15
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make
sure that all speaker cables and input sources are
properly connected, and leave the AV receiver with
its power cord disconnected for 1 hour. After that,
reconnect the power cord and turn the power on. If
the AV receiver turns off again, unplug the power
cord and contact your Onkyo dealer.
Caution: If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, the speaker cables may be
shorting.

HOME

To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down
HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3 seconds).
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.

Make sure that the digital input source is selected
properly.

Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all
components are connected properly.

The AV receiver will automatically enter standby
76
mode when Auto Standby has been set and launches.

RECEIVER

■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
59

Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed 18
in all the way.

Power

■ The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly

Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your radio
presets and custom settings.

Audio

WARNING
If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.

En-91

19-21

Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
15
correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal.
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.

Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.

Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for —
home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,
allowing precise adjustment.
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV
receiver’s display, press the remote controller’s
MUTING button to unmute the AV receiver.

While a pair of headphones is connected to the
49
PHONES jack, no sound is output from the speakers.
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to
an HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output
settings, and be sure to select a supported audio
format.

—

Check the digital audio output setting on the
connected device. On some game consoles, such as
those that support DVD, the default setting is off.

—

With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.

—

If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must
connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.

—

Make sure that none of the connecting cables are
bent, twisted, or damaged.

—

Not all listening modes use all speakers.

Specify the speaker distances and adjust the
individual speaker levels.

Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not
still connected.

—

Appendix
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. 72
Set it to “Off”.

■ Only the front speakers produce sound
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, 43
only the front speakers and subwoofer produce
sound.

■ The front high, front wide and surround back
speakers produce no sound
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound
may be produced by the front high, front wide and
surround back speakers. Select another listening
mode.

Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the —
front high, front wide and surround back speakers
may be weak.

In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set
to “Left / Right”.

Check the Speaker Configuration.

When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main —
room is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high,
front wide and surround back speakers produce no
sound.

If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro —
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
listening mode with a mono source, such as an AM
radio station or mono TV program, the sound is
concentrated in the center speaker.

When Powered Zone 3 is used, playback in the main —
room is reduced to 3.1channels and the front high,
front wide and surround back speakers produce no
sound.

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.

■ Only the center speaker produces sound

In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set
to “Center”.

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.

■ The surround speakers produce no sound
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or
Mono listening mode is selected, the surround
speakers produce no sound.

—

Depending on the source and current listening mode, 40
not much sound may be produced by the surround
speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.

When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, —
the center speaker produces no sound.
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set
to “Left / Right”.

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.

If no surround back speakers, front wide and front
—
high speakers are connected, or the Zone 2/3 speakers
are being used, 6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is 40-46
not always possible to select all of the listening
modes.

■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.

If the volume level of each individual speaker has
37, 61
been adjusted to high positive values, then the
maximum master volume possible may be reduced.
Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set
automatically after the Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Room Correction and Speaker Setup has been
performed.

■ Noise can be heard

■ The subwoofer produces no sound
—

Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and the like may degrade the
audio performance, so refrain from doing it.

—

When you play source material that contains no
information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer
produces no sound.

An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.

—

Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.

■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format
Check the digital audio output setting on the
connected device. On some game consoles, such as
those that support DVD, the default setting is off.

—

With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.

—

Depending on the input signal, some listening modes 40-46
cannot be selected.

■ The center speaker produces no sound

■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback

■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
while Zone 2/3 is on.

En-92

—

■ The Late Night function doesn’t work
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD.

Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness
Management” setting is not set to “Off”. The Late
Night function doesn’t work when this setting is
disabled.

Appendix
■ About DTS signals
When DTS program material ends and the DTS
—
bitstream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS
listening mode and the dts indicator remains on. This
is to prevent noise when you use the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player. If
you switch your player from DTS to PCM, you may
not hear any sound because the AV receiver does not
switch formats immediately. In such case, you should
stop your player for about three seconds and then
resume playback.
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to —
playback DTS material properly even though your
player is connected to a digital input on the AV
receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream
has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate,
or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver
doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such
cases, you may hear noise.
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may
produce a short audible noise. This is not a
malfunction.

—

■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio
signals, audio output may not start immediately.

—

■ There’s no sound during Whole House Mode
Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio input.

If the video source is connected to a component video 20, 58
input, you must assign that input to an input selector,
and your TV must be connected to either the HDMI
output or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
If the video source is connected to a composite video 20
input, your TV must be connected to the HDMI
output or the corresponding composite video output.
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector, and
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output.

19, 58

While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the 40
video circuitry is turned off and only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output.
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which —
the AV receiver is connected is selected.

■ There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is
not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC
are not guaranteed.

106

When the resolution is set to any resolution not
supported by the TV, no video is output from the
HDMI output.

■ There’s no picture
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed 18
in all the way.
19, 20

■ The on-screen information does not appear
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen
51
information may not appear when the input signal
from HDMI IN is output to a device connected to the
HDMI output.

Tuner
■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light
Relocate your antenna.

—

Move the AV receiver away from your TV or
computer.

—

Listen to the station in mono.

When listening to an AM station, operating the
remote controller may cause noise.

—

Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.

—

Concrete walls weaken radio signals.

—

If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.

—

Remote Controller

If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the
—
AV receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV
does not support the current video resolution and you
need to select another resolution on your DVD
player.

■ The remote controller doesn’t work
Before operating this unit, be sure to press
RECEIVER.

—

Make sure that the batteries are installed with the
correct polarity.

Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of
batteries, or old and new batteries.

On your TV, make sure that the video input to which —
the AV receiver is connected is selected.

Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
5
away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor.

When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via
HDMI OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not
displayed.

Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
Relocate if necessary.

—

If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet
with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may
not work reliably when the doors are closed.

—

■ The on-screen menus don’t appear

Video

Make sure that each video component is properly
connected.

If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, select
“- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch
composite video, and component video sources.

En-93

—

Appendix
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote
controller mode.

12, 86

When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may
not work as expected.

—

Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control 85
code.
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver 77
and remote controller.

■ Can’t control other components
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u 21
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Connecting only an u cable won’t be enough.
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote
controller mode.

12, 86

If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the
48
TV/CD IN jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or
GAME 1 IN jacks, for the remote controller to work
properly, you must set the input display
appropriately.
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code.

To control another manufacturer’s component, point 85
the remote controller at that component.
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via 86
u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver.
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code
first.
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected 86
via u, point the remote controller at the component.
Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code
first.
The entered remote control code may not be correct.
If more than one code is listed, try each one.

—

■ Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
When learning commands, make sure that the
transmitting ends of both remote controllers are
pointing at each other.

Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that —
cannot be used for learning? Some commands
cannot be learned, especially those that contain
several instructions.

RI Dock for iPod/iPhone
■ There’s no sound
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.

—

Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in
the Dock.

—

Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct —
input source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.

—

Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.

—

■ There’s no video

Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may
not work as expected.

—

■ The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my
iPod/iPhone as the input source
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting —
a different input source. If playback is not paused, the
Direct Change function may select your iPod/iPhone
as the input source by mistake during the transition
between tracks.

■ iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.

—

Zone 2/3
■ There’s no sound

Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT
setting is set to On.

—

Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or —
the AV receiver.
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output
video.

—

■ The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t
control my iPod/iPhone
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in
—
the Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not
connect properly to the Dock. Always remove your
iPod/iPhone from the case before inserting it into the
Dock.

Only components connected to analog inputs can be
played in Zone 2/3.

—

■ The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to other 59
than “Normal”, Powered Zone 2/3 cannot be used.

Music Server and Internet Radio
■ Can’t access the server or Internet radio
Check the network connection between the AV
receiver and your router or switch.

107

—

Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.

—

The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s
displaying the Apple logo.

Make sure the server is up and running and
compatible with the AV receiver.

108

Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller,
point it toward your AV receiver.

—

Check the “Network”settings.

If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start
—
playback by pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play
button. Remote operation should then be possible.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.

En-94

—

■ Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver.

108

Appendix
If you download or copy large files on your
—
computer, playback may be interrupted. Try closing
any unused programs, use a more powerful computer,
or use a dedicated server.
If the server is serving large music files to several
—
networked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the
network, upgrade your network, or use a switch
instead of a hub.

■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always
76
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
the “Network” screen.
Check the “Network” settings.

■ Standby power consumption
75, 77
In the following cases, the power consumption in
standby mode may reach up to a maximum of
12.0 W:
– The “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting is set to
“On”. (Depending on the TV status, the AV
receiver will enter standby mode as usual.)
– The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than
“Off”.
– The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.
If an MHL-enabled mobile device is connected to the 19
AUX (front) input, the power consumption in standby
mode will increase.

■ The sound changes when I connect my
headphones

76
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening —
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.

USB Device Playback
■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.

While Zone 2/3 is selected, the u functions don’t
work.

Others

—

The AV receiver supports USB devices that support 108
the USB mass storage device class. However,
playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
USB memory devices with security functions cannot —
be played.

■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required
The values entered may be automatically adjusted
with values best-suited for your home theater.

—

■ The display doesn’t work
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio
listening mode is selected.

—

■ How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust”
menu to select “Main” or “Sub”.

■ The u functions don’t work
To use u, you must make an u connection and an 21
analog audio connection (RCA) between the
component and AV receiver, even if they are
connected digitally.

En-95

■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned 21
on.

■ When performing Automatic Speaker Setup, the
measurement fails and the message “Ambient
noise is too high.” is displayed.
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker —
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.

■ The following settings can be made for the
composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these
settings.
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the input
source that you want to set and the SETUP button
simultaneously. While holding down the input selector
button, press SETUP until “Video ATT :On” appears
on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.
To turn the setting off, repeat the above process so that
“Video ATT :Off” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, and release the buttons.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD, CBL/SAT,
STB/DVR, GAME 1, AUX, or USB input.
If you have a game console connected to the composite
video input, and the picture isn’t very clear, you can
attenuate the gain.
Video ATT :Off: The gain is not changed (default).
Video ATT :On: The gain is reduced by the values
specified below.
– 2 dB for the HDMI output.
– 6 dB for the MONITOR OUT V output.

Appendix
■ If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to
the HDMI output is unstable, try switching the
DeepColor function off
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously
press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons on
the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR, press
8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off” appears on
the AV receiver’s display. Then, release both buttons.
To reactivate the DeepColor function, repeat the above
process until “Deep Color:On” appears on the AV
receiver’s display and release the buttons.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it
back in.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental
fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit’s
malfunction. Before you record important data, make
sure that the material will be recorded correctly.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.

Important Note Regarding Video Playback
The AV receiver can upconvert component video and
composite video sources for display on a TV connected to
the HDMI output. However, if the picture quality of the
source is poor, upconversion may make the picture worse
or disappear altogether.
In this case, try the following:

If the video source is connected to a component
video input, connect your TV to COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
If the video source is connected to a composite video
input, connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V.

On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”,
and then “Component Video Input” (➔ page 58).
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 1, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN1”.
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN 2, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN2”.
If the video source is connected to a composite video
input, select the relevant input selector, and assign it to
“- - - - -”.

Tip
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to
“Direct” (➔ page 70).

En-96

Appendix

Firmware Update
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can choose
from the following two methods: update via network, or
update via USB storage. Choose the one that best suits
your environment. Before proceeding with the update,
please read the corresponding explanations carefully.
■ Update via network
You need a wired Internet connection to update the
firmware.
■ Update via USB storage (➔ page 99)
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a USB flash
memory stick. You need at least 32 MB of available
space to update the firmware.

Limitation of liability
The program and accompanying online documentation
are furnished to you for use at your own risk. Onkyo will
not be liable and you will have no remedy for damages
for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your
use of the program or the accompanying online
documentation, regardless of legal theory, and whether
arising in tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be
liable to you or any third party for any special, indirect,
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,
including, but not limited to, compensation,
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of
present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for any
other reason whatsoever.
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.

Note
• Check the network connection before updating.
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV receiver
during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it
is being updated.
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is being
updated.
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated as an
independent device.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver may take
a while to read it.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes
the ability to power them.
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage
of data resulting from the use of a USB device with the AV
receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port, Onkyo
recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported.
Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.

Updating the Firmware via Network
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using
network connection on the rear panel.
Note
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and an
Ethernet cable is connected to the rear panel of the AV receiver.
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being
updated.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the
update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it
is being updated.
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.
• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is
finished.

Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 75).
• Turn off the controller device connected via RS232 and
Ethernet cable.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.

En-97

Appendix

Update Procedure

Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote
controller.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.

Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver is
turned on. Please wait until it becomes operable.

Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.
Note that this option will not be available if there is no
firmware file newer than the currently installed
version.

Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
During the update process, the on-screen display may
disappear depending on the updated program. When
this occurs, you can still view the update progress on
the AV receiver’s display. The on-screen display will
reappear after the update is complete, and upon
turning the AV receiver off and on again.

The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update has
been completed.

Turn off the AV receiver using 8ON/STANDBY on
the front panel.
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote controller.
Once turned off, the AV receiver will automatically
turn on again.
Congratulations! You now have the latest firmware
installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.

Troubleshooting
Case 1:
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the front
display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the following
table and take appropriate action.
■ Errors during an update via network
Error Code

Description

*-10, *-20

The Ethernet cable was not detected.
Reconnect the cable properly.

*-11, *-13, *-21,

Internet connection error.
Check the following items:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway address, and DNS server are
configured properly.
• Make sure the router is turned on.
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router are
connected with an Ethernet cable.
• Make sure your router is configured properly.
See the instruction manual of the router.
• If your network allows only one client
connection and there is any other device
already connected, the AV receiver will not be
able to access the network. Consult your
Internet Service Provider (ISP).
• If your modem does not function as a router,
you will need a router. Depending on your
network, you may need to configure the proxy
server if necessary. See the document
provided by your ISP. If you are still unable to
access the Internet, the DNS or proxy server
may be temporarily down. Contact your ISP.

*-28

Others

Retry the update procedure from the beginning.
If the error persists, please contact Onkyo
Support (➔ page 100) and provide the error
code.

Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect
then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.

En-98

Case 3:
If you do not have an Internet connection to the network,
please contact Onkyo Support (➔ page 100).

Appendix

Updating the Firmware via USB
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using a
USB device.
Note
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update
process.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device during the
update process.
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the firmware
file or the AC power cord during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC while it
is being updated.
• It takes up to 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update is
finished.

Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI Control(RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 75).
• Turn off the controller device connected via Ethernet
cable.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio,
iPod/iPhone, USB or servers, etc.
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.

Update Procedure

Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is any
data in the USB device, remove it first.

Download the firmware file from the Onkyo web
site. The file name is as follows:
ONKAVR****_************.zip
Unzip the downloaded file. The following five files
are created:
ONKAVR****_************.of1
ONKAVR****_************.of2
ONKAVR****_************.of3
ONKAVR****_************.of4
ONKAVR****_************.of5

Copy the extracted files to the USB device. Be
careful not to copy the zip file.

Remove the USB device from your PC and connect
it to the USB port on the AV receiver.
When the AV receiver has two USB ports, you can
use either one.

Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned on.
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up the
front display.

Select the USB input source.
“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display and then the name of the USB device is
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize the
USB device.

Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the remote
controller.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.

Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.

En-99

Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.
Note that this option will not be available if there is no
firmware file newer than the currently installed
version.

The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update has
been completed.
Remove the USB device.

Appendix

Description

*-10, *-20

The USB device was not detected. Make sure
the USB flash memory or USB cable is
properly connected to the USB port. If the USB
storage device has its own power supply, use it
to power the USB device.

*-14

Others

The firmware file was not found in the root
folder of the USB device, or the firmware file is
for another model. Retry and download the file
on the support page of the web site, following
the on-site instructions. If the error persists,
please contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
Retry the update procedure from the beginning.
If the error persists, please contact Onkyo
Support and provide the error code.

Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process, disconnect
then reconnect the AC power cord and try again.

2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
http://www.onkyo.com/
The Americas
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:
Tel: 201-785-2600
Fax: 201-785-2650
Hours:M-F 9am-5pm ET
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
For Product Support Team Only:
1-800-229-1687
Hours:M-F 9am-8pm / Sat-Sun 10am-8pm ET
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Europe
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
China, Hong Kong
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim
Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.onkyochina.com
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo
SUPPORT site.
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/firmware/index.html
The above-mentioned information is subject to change
without prior notice. Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest
update.

En-100

Appendix

Connection Tips and
Video Signal Path
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for
compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The
format you choose will depend on the formats supported by
your components. Use the following sections as a guide.
The on-screen setup menus appear only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.

Video Connection Formats
Video components can be connected by using any one of
the following video connection formats: composite video,
PC IN (Analog RGB), component video, or HDMI, the
latter offering the best picture quality.
Tip
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video
signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g.,
component video input passing through to component video
output).
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture Mode” setting to
“Direct” (➔ page 70).

■ “Monitor Out” set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI
Sub”
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB), and
component video sources all being upconverted for the
HDMI output. Use these settings if you connect either
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB of the AV
receiver to your TV.
The composite video and component video outputs pass
through their respective input signals as they are.

■ “Monitor Out” set to “Both”
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video, PC IN (Analog RGB), and
component video sources all being upconverted for both
HDMI outputs. Use this setting if you connect both
HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB of the AV
receiver to your TV.
Note that video signals are output from both HDMI outputs
at the resolution supported by both TVs.
The composite video and component video outputs pass
through their respective input signals as they are.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

Composite

Component

AV receiver

MONITOR OUT
Composite

HDMI

AV receiver

MONITOR OUT
Component

TV, projector, etc.

En-101

Component

HDMI

Note

Composite

HDMI

TV, projector, etc.

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

PC IN
(Analog RGB)

Component

Video Signal Flow Chart

Composite

PC IN
(Analog RGB)

HDMI

• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the “Resolution” setting
cannot be selected.

Appendix
■ Signal Selection
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:
HDMI, component video, composite video.
However, for component video only, regardless of whether
a component video signal is actually present, if a
component video input is assigned to the input selector,
that component video input will be selected. And if no
component video input is assigned to the input selector,
this will be interpreted as no component video signal being
present.
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite video
inputs. However, the HDMI signal is automatically
selected as the source and the video is output by the HDMI
output.

Audio Connection Formats
Audio components can be connected by using any of the
following audio connection formats: analog, optical,
coaxial, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind that the
AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for
analog line outputs and vice versa.
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:
HDMI, digital, analog.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

Signal Selection Example

Analog

AV receiver
Composite

Component

Optical

Coaxial

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

AV receiver

Component

HDMI

TV, projector, etc.

MONITOR OUT
Composite

HDMI

Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (➔ page 75).
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to
“Auto” (➔ page 76), the TV/CD input selector is selected,
and your TV is ARC capable.
Tip

• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding input
selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the case of an
optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL indicator lights. In
the case of an analog connection, neither of the HDMI and
DIGITAL indicators light.

En-102

Appendix

Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.
NTSC/PAL
✔: Output available
Output

HDMI
4K*2

1080p/24

✔

✔*4

1080p

✔

✔*4

1080i

✔

720p

✔

480p/576p

Input
HDMI

Component

Composite

1080i

720p

✔

✔*4

✔

✔*4

✔

✔*4

480i/576i

✔

1080p

✔

✔*4*5

1080i

✔

✔*5

✔*4*5

✔

720p

✔

✔*5

✔*4*5

480p/576p

✔

✔*5

✔*4*5

480i/576i

✔

✔*5

✔*4*5

✔*5

480i/576i

✔

✔*5

✔*4*5

✔*5

✔

✔*5

PC IN (Analog RGB)*1*3
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

1080p

480p/576p

480i/576i

Component
1080p
1080i

720p

480p/576p

480i/576i

Composite
480i/576i

✔*4
✔
✔
✔
✔

Available resolutions: [640 × 480 60 Hz], [800 × 600 60 Hz], [1024 × 768 60 Hz], [1280 × 1024 60 Hz]
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 24/25/30 Hz], [4096 × 2160 24 Hz]
When video signals of personal computers connected to PC IN are output from HDMI OUT SUB, they may not display properly on some TVs.
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB (“Monitor Out” = “Sub”).
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB (“Monitor Out” = “Both”).

En-103

✔
✔

Appendix

Using an RIHDcompatible TV, Player,
or Recorder
p, which stands for Remote Interactive over
HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on
Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be used with
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows
system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI
standard. CEC provides interoperability between various
components, however, operation with components other
than p-compatible components cannot be
guaranteed.

Operations that can be performed with
p connection

About p-Compatible Components
The following components are p-compatible (As
of January 2012).
■ TV
• Toshiba TV
• Sharp TV
■ Players/Recorders
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players
• Toshiba players and recorders
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used together
with Sharp TV)
*

Models other than those mentioned above may have some
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.

Note
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more pcompatible components than the quantities specified below, to
the HDMI input terminal.
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.
– Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up to
three.
– Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV
amplifier via HDMI.
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more
p-compatible components than the above-mentioned
quantities are connected.

■ For p-compatible TV
The following linked operations are enabled by connecting
the AV receiver to an p-compatible TV.
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the TV is
set to standby.
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either output
the audio from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the tuner or
auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of the AV
receiver. (A connection such as an optical digital cable or
similar is required in addition to the HDMI cable.)
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote
controller of the TV.
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the
AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller
of the TV.
■ For p-compatible players/recorders
The following linked operations are enabled by connecting
the AV receiver to an p-compatible
player/recorder.
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the
player/recorder that is playing back.
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using the
remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.
*

Depending on the model used, not all operations may be
available.

To be continued

En-104

Appendix
■ How to connect and setup

Confirm the connection and settings.
1. Connect the HDMI OUT MAIN jack to the HDMI
input jack of the TV.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.

HDMI
connection
AV receiver
DIGITAL AUDIO
connection
(OPTICAL)

HDMI
connection

TV, projector, etc.

2. Connect the audio output from the TV to the
OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an
optical digital cable.
Note
• When the audio return channel (ARC) function is used with
an ARC capable TV, this connection is not necessary
(➔ page 76).

3. Connect the HDMI output of the Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player/recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack
of the AV receiver.
Note
• It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting
the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder to other jacks
(➔ page 58). Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD
selector at this time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer
Electronics Control) operation will not be guaranteed.

Change each item in the “HDMI” menu according
to the following settings:
• HDMI Control(RIHD): On
• Audio Return Channel (ARC): Auto
See details of each setting (➔ pages 75, 76).
Confirm the settings.
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the
power of the connected components is turned off
automatically with the link operation.
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder.
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder, and verify the following:
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and
selects the input to which the Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player/recorder is connected.
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the
input to which the AV receiver is connected.
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the
TV speakers.
Note
• Perform the above operations when you use the AV receiver
for the first time, when the settings of each component are
changed, when the main power of each component is turned
off, when the power cable is disconnected from the power
supply, or when there has been a power outage.

En-105

Operate with the remote controller.
For buttons that can be operated (➔ page 87).
Note
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending
on the player models.)
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, redo the corresponding operations on the TV.
• In case of an p connection with u and u audio
control compatible components, do not connect the u
cable at the same time.
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
receiver is connected to an p compatible TV or
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
output audio from the TV.
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
depending on the component model connected. In such
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.

Appendix

About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV,
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new
digital interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors,
Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video
components. Until now, several separate video and audio
cables have been required to connect AV components.
With HDMI, a single cable can carry control signals,
digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2channel PCM, multichannel digital audio, and
multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible
with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-toDVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible
components can display the picture.

Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support the
HDMI output of the above audio formats.

About Copyright Protection
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver
via HDMI must also support HDCP.

*1
*2

DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface
standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The
video encryption technology developed by Intel for
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and requires
a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon
Image, this open industry group’s objective is to address the
industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification
for high-performance PCs and digital displays.

Note
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual
Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be
connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that
DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need to make a
separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with
such an adapter is not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from
a PC are not supported.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be
restricted by the connected source component. If the picture is
poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI,
check its setup. Refer to the connected component’s instruction
manual for details.

The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the
following:
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip
Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DSD and Multichannel PCM.

En-106

Appendix

Network/USB Features
Connecting to the Network
The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV
receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
Internet radio

Modem

WAN
LAN

Router

Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to play
music on a computer that’s connected to the network
wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it is
recommended to use wired connections.
■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, data-routing and supplying
of IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows
several networked computers to access the Internet
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The AV
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). DHCP
supplies IP addresses to the network devices, allowing
them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is
recommended.
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some Internet
Service Providers (ISP) require you to use specific routers.
Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re
unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.

Computer or media server

■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have
Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results,
so a broadband connection is strongly recommended (e.g.,
cable modem, xDSL modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP
or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
Note
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your broadband
Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web.

En-107

Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet
connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings
automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually,
see “Network” (➔ page 76).
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you have
a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a PPPoEcompatible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy server
to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured to use a
proxy server, use the same settings for the AV receiver
(➔ page 77).

Appendix

Server Requirements
■ Server playback
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Player 12
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• DLNA-certified media server
If the operating system of your computer is Windows
Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.
Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be
downloaded for free from the Microsoft web site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may
be nested up to 16 levels deep.
Note
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.

Minimum system requirements for Windows Media
Player 11 on Windows XP
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP
Professional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition
(SP2), Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center
Edition 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup
for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
Memory:
64 MB
Hard disk:
200 MB of free space
Drive:
CD or DVD drive
Modem:
28.8 kbps
Sound card:
16-bit sound card
Monitor:
Super VGA (800 x 600)
Video card:
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Software:
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based Pocket
PC or smartphone)
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
■ Remote playback
• Windows Media Player 12
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller device.
The setting varies depending on the media server or
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction
manual for details.
If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is already installed.
For more information, see the Microsoft web site.

En-108

USB Device Requirements
• USB mass storage device class (but not always
guaranteed).
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each section
will be treated as an independent device.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders may
be nested up to 16 levels deep.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
Note
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No
Storage” will be displayed.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s USB
port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the
USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB devices to
be connected to computers without the need for special drivers or
software. Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer to your USB MP3 player’s
instruction manual for details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device is used
with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back up your
important music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with special
music software are not supported.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which includes
the ability to power them.
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB device
must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver make
take a while to read it.
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.

Appendix

Supported Audio File Formats
For server playback and playback from a USB device, the
AV receiver supports the following music file formats.
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,
playback times may not display correctly.
Note
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the
following music file formats: FLAC and Ogg Vorbis.
• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file formats
may not be played depending on the server type.

■ MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
■ WMA (.wma or .WMA)
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by
using Windows Media® Player.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, bitrates of
between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, and WMA DRM are
supported.
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
■ WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz
are supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit

■ WAV (.wav or .WAV)
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ AAC
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/
.3GP or .3G2)
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps and
320 kbps are supported.
■ FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and
bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
*

Only for playback via network.

■ Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit

En-109

■ DSD (.dsf or .DSF)
• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.
■ Dolby True HD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)
• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz,
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.

About DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA develop a
concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks
where digital content such as photos, music, and videos can
be shared through consumer electronics, personal
computers, and mobile devices in and beyond the home.
The AV receiver complies with the DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5.

Appendix

License and Trademark
Information
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may
be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No's: 5,956,674,
5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616, 7,212,872,
7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,333,929,
7,548,853 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and
pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.

THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be
THX Select2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series
of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your
guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
come. THX Select2 Plus requirements define hundreds
of parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for both
digital and analog domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers
also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX
Mode) which accurately translate movie soundtracks for
home theater playback.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby,
Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™, Inc.
U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and
Audyssey DSX® are registered trademarks of
Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital
Living Network Alliance.”
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft
group of companies.
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its affiliates.
HQV® (Hollywood Quality Video) is a trademark of
Qualcomm Incorporated.
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of
THX Ltd.

“HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.”
“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are
trademark or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the United
States and other counties.”

InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to
meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for
the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone
may affect wireless performance.
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.

En-110

Appendix

Specifications
Amplifier Section
Rated Output Power
All channels:

(North American)
135 watts minimum continuous power per
channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels driven
from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a maximum
total harmonic distortion of 0.08% (FTC)
(Others)
7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven
of 1% (IEC)
Maximum Effective Output Power
(Asian)
7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven
(JEITA)
Dynamic Power*
* IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power
300 W (3 Ω, Front)
250 W (4 Ω, Front)
150 W (8 Ω, Front)
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)
Damping Factor
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance
200 mV/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance
4.6 V/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
Phono Overload
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5%)
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (Direct mode)
Tone Control Characteristics
±10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance
4 Ω - 16 Ω

Video Section

■ Video Inputs

Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB

Component
Composite

FM Tuning Frequency Range
(North American) 87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz
(Others) 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS
AM Tuning Frequency Range
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz
Preset Channel
40

General
Power Supply

(North American) AC 120 V, 60 Hz
(Others) AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption (North American) 8.1 A
(Others) 720 W
No-sound Power Consumption
(North American) 95 W
(Others) 90 W
Stand-by Power Consumption
0.1 W
Dimensions (W × H × D)
435 mm × 198.5 mm × 435.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/8"
Weight
18.3 kg (40.3 lbs.)

■ HDMI

Output
Video Resolution
Audio Format
Supported

■ Video Outputs
Component
Composite

Tuner Section

Input

Analog RGB

IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,
AUX INPUT
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
1080p
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DVD-Audio, DSD
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD)

En-111

IN 1, IN 2
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,
AUX
PC IN

MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT

■ Audio Inputs
Digital
Analog

Optical: 2 (Rear), 1(Front)
Coaxial: 3
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME 1,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO, AUX

■ Audio Outputs
Analog
ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT
Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs
9
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
2
Speaker Outputs
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR) + Front
Wide/ZONE2 (L, R) + Front High/ZONE3
(L, R)
Phones
1 (6.3 ø)

■ Others
Setup Mic
RS232
RI
USB
Ethernet
IR Input
IR Output
12 V Trigger Out

1
1
1
1 (Front)/1 (Rear)
1
1
1
2

Specifications and features are subject to change
without notice.

2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
http://www.onkyo.com/
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 800-229-1687, 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK
Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44-(0)1628-401-700
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.onkyochina.com/
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJin Road, Jin an, Shanghai,
China 200041, Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/

Y1203-1
SN 29401132EN
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.

* 2 9 4 0 1 1 3 2 E N *

Using Internet Radio

Using Internet Radio
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Note
• Available services may vary depending on the region.

1
2

Press NET.
A list of the network services appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.

Using Multiple Accounts
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts, which
means you can freely switch between several logins.
After registering user accounts, login is performed from
the “Users” screen.

Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or delete
an existing one.

Pandora® internet radio –Getting Started
(U.S. only) ................................................. 2

Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3

Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio (North
American only) ......................................... 4

Using Last.fm Internet Radio ........................ 5
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.

Using Slacker Personal Radio ...................... 6

Using MP3tunes ............................................. 7

En-1

Using Internet Radio

Pandora® internet radio
–Getting Started (U.S. only)
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service that
plays the music you know and helps you discover music
you’ll love.

Use q/w to select “I have a Pandora Account” or
“I’m new to Pandora” and then press ENTER.
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on your
TV screen. Please write down this code. Go to an
Internet connected computer and point your browser
to www.pandora.com/onkyo
Enter your activation code and then follow the
instructions to create your Pandora account and your
personalized Pandora Internet radio stations. You can
create your stations by entering your favorite songs
and artists when prompted. After you have created
your account and stations you can return to your
Onkyo receiver and press enter to begin listening to
your personalized Pandora Internet radio.
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can add
your Pandora account to your Onkyo receiver by
selecting “I have a Pandora Account” and logging in
with your email and password.

To play a station, use q/w to select the station from
your station list, and then press ENTER.
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
Create a New Station:
Enter the name of a song, artist, or genre and Pandora
will create a unique radio station for you based on the
musical qualities of that song, artist, or genre.
■ Menu Items
I like this song:
Give a song “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play more
music like it.
I don’t like this song:
Give a song “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban that
song from the current station.
Why is this song playing?:
Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora
uses to create your personal radio stations.
Don’t play the song for a month:
If you are tired of a song, you can put the song to sleep
and Pandora will not play it for one month.
Create station from this artist:
Creates a radio station from this artist.

Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

En-2

Delete this station:
This will permanently delete a station from your
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback will be
lost should you choose to re-create the station with the
same song or artist.
Create station from this song:
Creates a radio station from this song.
Rename this station:
Lets you rename the current radio station.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your
profile on www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this song:
Pandora will bookmark the current song and allow
you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes in one
step!
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.

PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora
Media, Inc. Used with permission.

Using Internet Radio

Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)

Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account” and then
press ENTER.
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you don’t
have one yet, you can create a new account at
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select
“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.
Enter your user name (usually your email) and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.

Use q/w to select the menu, then press ENTER.
Search:
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or Track.
Music Guide:
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists, Top
Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and Staff Picks.
Rhapsody Channels:
Listen to radio channels programmed by Rhapsody’s
top-notch editors.
Playlists:
Play your own personal playlists.
My Library:
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from the
Rhapsody catalog using My Library.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.

Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

Use q/w to select a channel, and press ENTER or
1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,
RANDOM, REPEAT
Note
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t work.

■ Menu Items
Add track to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.
Add album to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing albums.
Add playlist to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.
Add channel to My Channels:
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio
channels.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites list.
Tip
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and Rhapsody
Channels from My Library.

En-3

Using Internet Radio

Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)

Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of SiriusXM
Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen shows how
many days are left in your trial. After the trial period
expires, if you want to continue listening to the service,
you must subscribe. To subscribe go to
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your computer.

Use q/w to select “Sign In”, and then press ENTER.
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can sign
in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user name and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup. If you don’t know your username or password,
call Sirius XM at (888) 539-7474 for assistance.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

When you subscribe, you will be provided with a username
and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver.

■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays the
category available for selection.

To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your AV
receiver connected to the Internet. Using the remote
control, follow these steps:

Use q/w to select the category and then press
ENTER.
The channel list screen for the selected category
appears.

Use q/w to select the desired channel and then press
ENTER.
The playback screen for the selected channel appears
and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Menu Items
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.

En-4

SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately
and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions (see
www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this agreement before
you purchase your subscription. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

Using Internet Radio

Using Last.fm Internet Radio

Last.fm is a music service that learns what you love...
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you have a
free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all the songs
you’ve just played. When you visit the Last.fm website,
you can see personal charts of the music you’ve enjoyed,
share them with friends and see what they like, too.

■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/r and the ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm Internet
Radio” screen appears.

With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless
choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a
great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm
account today at www.last.fm/join
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free
Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a
computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt
as your tastes change.
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music
inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve
heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create your
account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the
world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full
information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe

Profile:
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
It signs out from your account.

Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”, and
then press ENTER.
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can sign
in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in the
next keyboard screen.

■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.

Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

Use q/w to select menu and then press ENTER.
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
• You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).

En-5

Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER or 1
to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.

■ Using scrobbling control
Use q/w to select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
*

Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.

Using Internet Radio

Using Slacker Personal Radio

If you do not have an account, create one on the
Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with your
computer.
If you already have a Slacker account, select “Sign
in to your account” and then press ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
information from the remote control or the keys on the
main unit.

If there are no mistakes in the information you have
entered, use q/w/e/r to select “OK” then press
ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen appears.

If you do not have an account, select “Access
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a
restricted version of the service.
Note that use will be restricted.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

Use q/w to select a menu item and then press
ENTER.
To sign out, use q/w to select “Sign out” from this
screen and then press ENTER.

Use q/w to select a station and then press ENTER
or 1 to start playback from the station.
The playback screen appears.

You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6
■ Menu Items
Rate Song as Favorite:
Stores information to server, making it more likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Song:
Stores information to server, making it less likely that
the song will be played again.
Ban Artist:
Stores information to server, making it less likely that
the songs from this artist will be played again.
Mark Favorite:
Adds the currently playing station to your favorites.
Unmark Favorite:
Deletes the currently playing station from your
favorites.
Add song to Library:
Adds the currently playing track to your library.
Delete song from Library:
Deletes the currently playing track from your library.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.

En-6

Using Internet Radio

Using MP3tunes
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer plus
safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:

Playing Contents on the AV Receiver

Tip
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes service as
described in “Common Procedures in Internet Radio Menu”
(➔ page 1).

Creating an Account on your Computer

From your computer, open a web browser and go
to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup

2
3

Create an account.

View, edit and listen to your files by clicking on
Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).

Use q/w to select “Sign in to your account”, and
then press ENTER.

Enter the e-mail address and password you used
when creating your account, select “OK” and press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter your user
name and password from the remote controller or the
buttons on the AV receiver.

Click the Upload link (www.mp3tunes.com/upload)
to add files to your Locker.

If there are no mistakes in the information you have
entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen appears.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

Use q/w to select the menu, then press ENTER.
Music:
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and Playlists.
Shuffle:
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from your
Locker.
Search:
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.
Account Info:
Your MP3tunes account information.
Sign Out:
Log out of your MP3tunes account.

The track at the top of the music list is automatically
played back.

En-7

Use q/w to select a track and press ENTER or 1
to start playback.
A playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6
■ Menu Items
Go to Menu:
Displays additional menu options.

You can view or change your MP3tunes account
settings by going to www.mp3tunes.com/account.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Utilisation d’une
webradio
Procédures courantes dans le menu de
webradio
Remarque
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la région.

1
2

Appuyez sur NET.
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le témoin
NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le câble
Ethernet est fermement branché sur l’ampli-tuner AV.
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur
ENTER.
La page principale du service sélectionné s’affiche.

Utilisation de plusieurs comptes
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».

Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est
affiché.
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :
Add new user :
Remove this user :
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.

Pandora® internet Radio –Pour commencer
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2

Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
uniquement).............................................. 3

Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4

Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................ 5

Conseil
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord vous
déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez depuis
l’écran « Users ».

Fr-1

Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6

Utilisation d’une webradio

Pandora® internet Radio
–Pour commencer (États-Unis
uniquement)
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que vous
connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous aimez.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « I have a Pandora
Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora », puis appuyez
sur ENTER.
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez « I’m
new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation apparaîtra
sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez ce code. Utilisez
un ordinateur branché sur Internet et connectez le
navigateur à www.pandora.com/onkyo
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et vos
stations webradio Pandora personnalisées. Lorsque
vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer vos stations en
saisissant vos chansons et vos artistes préférés. Après
la création de votre compte et de vos stations, vous
pouvez retourner à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez
sur entrée pour écouter votre webradio Pandora
personnalisée.
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous pouvez
ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre récepteur Onkyo
en sélectionnant « I have a Pandora Account » et y
accéder en entrant votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de
passe.

Pour lire une station, utilisez q/w pour sélectionner
la station dans votre liste de stations, puis appuyez
sur ENTER.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Create a New Station :
Saisissez le nom d’une chanson, d’un artiste ou d’un
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique pour
vous en fonction des qualités musicales de la chanson,
de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.
■ Eléments du menu
I like this song :
Acceptez la chanson et Pandora lira d’autres musiques
similaires.
I don’t like this song :
Rejetez la chanson et Pandora éliminera cette chanson
de la station courante.
Why is this song playing? :
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio
personnelles.
Don’t play the song for a month :
Si vous en avez assez d’une chanson, vous pouvez
mettre la chanson « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira
plus pendant un mois.
Create station from this artist :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet artiste.

Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».

Fr-2

Delete this station :
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station de
votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous décideriez de
récréer la station avec les mêmes chansons ou les
mêmes artistes, tous vos acceptations/rejets précédents
seront perdus.
Create station from this song :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cette
chanson.
Rename this station :
Vous permet de renommer la station radio actuelle.
Bookmark this artist :
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour votre
profil sur www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this song :
Pandora marquera la chanson en cours et vous
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou iTunes
en une étape !
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.

PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage
commercial Pandora sont des marques commerciales ou
des marques déposées de la société Pandora Media, Inc.
Utilisées avec autorisation.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
uniquement)

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign in to your
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration Web.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your
entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner le menu, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Search :
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par artiste, par
album ou par piste.
Music Guide :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des genres,des
meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs albums, des
meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et des sélections du
personnel.
Rhapsody Channels :
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.
Playlists :
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture personnelles.
My Library :
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles dans le
catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My Library.
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un canal, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la
lecture.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur
la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7, 6,
RANDOM, REPEAT
Remarque
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne fonctionnent
pas.

■ Eléments du menu
Add track to My Library :
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.
Add album to My Library :
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.
Add playlist to My Library :
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.
Add channel to My Channels :
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours de
lecture.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste de
lecture à la liste My Favorites.
Conseil
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des canaux
Rhapsody marqués de My Library.

Fr-3

Utilisation d’une webradio

Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)

Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai gratuit de
SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account Info » affiche
le nombre de jours restants dans votre essai. Une fois la
période d’essai expirée, si vous souhaitez continuer à
écouter le service, vous devez vous abonner. Pour vous
inscrire, accédez à l’adresse
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe
dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration
Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas votre nom
d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe, appelez Sirius XM
au (888) 539-7474 pour obtenir une assistance.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».

Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un nom
est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être saisis dans
l’ampli-tuner AV.

■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your
entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran « SiriusXM
Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie que vous
pouvez sélectionner.

Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous à
l’aide de la télécommande :

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner la catégorie, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie
sélectionnée s’affiche.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner le canal de votre
choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche et
vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur
la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.

Fr-4

Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont vendus
séparément et sont subordonnés par les conditions Sirius
(voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous de lire cet accord
avant d’acquérir votre abonnement. Sirius, XM et tous les
logos et marques afférents sont des marques déposées de
Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de ses filiales. Tous droits
réservés.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm

Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que vous
aimez…
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent. Si
vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une trace de
toutes les chansons que vous avez juste jouées. Quand vous
vous rendez sur le site Web de Last.fm, vous pouvez voir
les graphiques personnels de la musique que vous avez
appréciée, les partagez avec vos amis et également voir ce
qu’ils aiment.

■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/r et le bouton ENTER pour
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de
passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm your
entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm
Internet Radio » apparait.

Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un choix
infini de stations de radio personnalisées et sans pub,
Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir de la musique.
Créez aujourd’hui votre compte Last.fm gratuit sur
www.last.fm/join
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur de la
radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo
sans ordinateur !
Recommended Radio :
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées futées qui
changent en même temps que vos goûts.
Artist Radio :
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous jouerons
une station entière de musique inspirée par votre choix.
My Library :
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à partir
de toute la musique que vous avez entendue depuis que
vous avez joint Last.fm.
Tag Radio :
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et nous
vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même ce que
cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts des doigts.
Les derniers prix et les informations complètes sont
disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe

Profile :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently Listened
Tracks », « Library » et « Neighbours ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Sign in to your
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous pouvez
vous y connecter pour sélectionner « Sign in to your
account ». Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot
de passe dans l’écran clavier suivant.

■ Eléments du menu
I Love this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture augmente.
Ban this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture diminue.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My Favorites.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un menu puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Search Station :
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste, par tag
ou par nom d’utilisateur.
Top Artists Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux évalués.
Top Tags Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux évalués.
Personal Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your
Neighbourhood » et « Your Recommendations »).

Fr-5

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner une station, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la lecture.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.

■ Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling
Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner « Enable », puis appuyez
sur ENTER.
*

Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles dans
certaines zones.

Utilisation d’une webradio

Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio

Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en un à
partir du site Web de Slacker (www.slacker.com) à
l’aide de votre ordinateur.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des
touches sur l’appareil principal.

Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r pour
sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de confirmation des informations du compte
s’affiche.

Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, sélectionnez
« Access without Sign In », puis appuyez sur
ENTER pour utiliser une version restreinte du
service.
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes utilisateur,
consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs comptes » (➔ page 1).
L’identification peut être réalisée à partir de l’écran
« Users ».

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner un élément du menu,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/w pour sélectionner
« Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis appuyez sur
ENTER.

Utilisez q/w pour sélectionner une station, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1 pour démarrer la
lecture depuis cette station.
L’écran de lecture apparaît.

Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les touches sur
la télécommande.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Rate Song as Favorite :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et
d’augmenter la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de
nouveau.
Ban Song :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et
de diminuer la probabilité que le morceau soit lu de
nouveau.
Ban Artist :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le serveur, et
de diminuer la probabilité que les morceaux de cet
artiste soient lus de nouveau.
Mark Favorite :
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à vos
favoris.
Unmark Favorite :
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de lecture de
vos favoris.
Add song to Library :
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à votre
bibliothèque.
Delete song from Library :
Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture de
votre bibliothèque.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la liste
My Favorites.

Fr-6

Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Internet Radio
Procedimientos comunes en el menú
Internet Radio

Uso de múltiples cuentas
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de usuario,
lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar libremente
entre varios usuarios. Después de registrar las cuentas de
usuario, el acceso se realiza desde la pantalla “Users”.

Nota

• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a otra.

Pulse NET.
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea, verifique
que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente conectado al
receptor de AV.
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio
seleccionado.

Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de
usuarios.
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o borrar
una existente.

Pandora® Internet Radio –Primeros pasos
(solo EE.UU.) ............................................ 2

Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3

Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica) ........................................... 4

Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio ...................... 5

Consejo
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples
cuentas de usuario.
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.

Es-1

Uso de Slacker Personal Radio .................... 6

Uso de Internet Radio

Pandora® Internet Radio
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted conoce y
le ayudará a descubrir música que le encantará.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar “I have a Pandora
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego pulse
ENTER.
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la pantalla
del televisor. Tome nota de este código. Vaya a un
ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija el navegador a
www.pandora.com/onkyo
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y sus
emisoras de radio por Internet personalizadas de
Pandora. Puede crear sus propias emisoras
introduciendo sus canciones y artistas favoritos
cuando aparezca la solicitud correspondiente. Una vez
creada su cuenta y sus emisoras, puede regresar al
receptor Onkyo y pulsar Enter para empezar a
escuchar su radio por Internet personalizada de
Pandora.
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have a
Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora en la lista de
emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Create a New Station:
Introduzca el nombre de una canción, artista o género;
Pandora creará una emisora de radio exclusiva para
usted basada en las cualidades musicales de esa
canción, de ese artista o de ese género.
■ Elementos del menú
I like this song:
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) una canción, Pandora
reproducirá más música parecida.
I don’t like this song:
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) la canción, Pandora
eliminará dicha canción de la emisora actual.
Why is this song playing?:
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio
personalizadas.
Don’t play the song for a month:
Si se cansa de una canción, puede “silenciarla” de
modo que Pandora no la reproduzca durante un mes.
Create station from this artist:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este artista.

Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

Es-2

Delete this station:
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una emisora de
su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la información sobre sus
aprobaciones / desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere
volver a crear la emisora con la misma canción o
artista.
Create station from this song:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de esta canción.
Rename this station:
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil en
www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this song:
Pandora marcará la canción actual y le permitirá
comprarlas todas en Amazon o iTunes con un solo
paso.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.

PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la imagen
corporativa de Pandora son marcas comerciales o marcas
comerciales registradas de Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con
permiso.

Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)

Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account” y luego pulse ENTER.
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione “Sign in
to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el correo
electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que
aparece a continuación o en la configuración web.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm
your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Consejo

Utilice q/w para seleccionar el menú y luego pulse
ENTER.
Search:
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o canción.
Music Guide:
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas
principales, álbumes principales o canciones
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.
Rhapsody Channels:
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por los
principales redactores de Rhapsody.
Playlists:
Reproduzca sus listas personales.
My Library:
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en el
catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y luego
pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a
distancia.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Nota
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no
funcionan.

■ Elementos del menú
Add track to My Library:
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add album to My Library:
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add playlist to My Library:
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add channel to My Channels:
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de reproducción a
la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las emisoras de
Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.

Es-3

Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica)

Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita de
SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account Info”
muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una vez que
termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir escuchando
este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para suscribirse vaya a
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su ordenador.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego
pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado que
aparece a continuación o en la configuración web. Si
no sabe su nombre de usuario o la contraseña, llame a
Sirius XM al número (888) 539-7474 para solicitar
asistencia.
Consejo

Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y una
contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor de AV.

• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el receptor de
AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para usar el mando a
distancia, siga este procedimiento:

■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/r y ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla “Confirm
your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la categoría
disponible para la selección.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar la categoría y luego
pulse ENTER.
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras de la
categoría seleccionada.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar la emisora deseada y
luego pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la emisora
seleccionada y ahora usted podrá escuchar SiriusXM
Internet Radio.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del mando a
distancia.
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Elementos del menú
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.

Es-4

Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se venden por
separado y se rigen por las condiciones de Sirius (consulte
www.sirius.com). Lea atentamente este acuerdo antes de
comprar la suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y
logotipos relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius
XM Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos
reservados.

Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio

Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le gusta...
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente. Si
tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un seguimiento
de todas las canciones que acaba de escuchar. Cuando
visite el sitio web de Last.fm, podrá ver listas personales de
la música que ha disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y
también ver lo que les gusta a ellos.

Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita variedad
de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin publicidad,
Last.fm es una forma excelente de descubrir música. Cree
hoy mismo una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm en
www.last.fm/join
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm Radio
sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin necesidad de
un ordenador.
Recommended Radio:
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada
momento.
Artist Radio:
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una emisora de
radio inspirada exclusivamente en su elección.
My Library:
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música que ha
escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y podrá
escucharlo durante horas.
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá por sí
mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del mundo al
alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los precios
actualizados y toda la información que desee en
www.last.fm/subscribe

Profile:
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Se desconecta de su cuenta.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede acceder a ella
para seleccionar “Sign in to your account”.
Introduzca su nombre de usuario y contraseña en la
siguiente pantalla de teclado.

■ Elementos del menú
I Love this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con la que
se reproduce.
Ban this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con la
que se reproduce.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.

Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar un menú y luego pulse
ENTER.
Search Station:
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o nombre
de usuario.
Top Artists Station:
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor
clasificados.
Top Tags Station:
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas mejor
clasificadas.
Personal Station:
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora personalizada
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” y “Your
Recommendations”).

Es-5

Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y luego
pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.

■ Uso del control de scrobbling
Utilice q/w para seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse
ENTER.
*

Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por terceros
pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén
disponibles en algunas zonas.

Uso de Internet Radio

Uso de Slacker Personal Radio

Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web de
Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su ordenador.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione “Sign
in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede introducir
información desde el mando a distancia o desde el
teclado de la unidad principal.

Si no hay errores en la información que ha
introducido, utilice q/w/e/r para seleccionar
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la
información de la cuenta.

Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access without
Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar una versión
restringida del servicio.
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario, consulte “Uso
de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se puede iniciar
sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar un menú y luego pulse
ENTER.
Para salir, utilice q/w para seleccionar “Sign out” en
esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.

Utilice q/w para seleccionar una emisora y luego
pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la reproducción de
la emisora.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.

Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6
■ Elementos del menú
Rate Song as Favorite:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea
más probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.
Ban Song:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea
menos probable que la canción se vuelva a reproducir.
Ban Artist:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que sea
menos probable que las canciones de este artista se
vuelvan a reproducir.
Mark Favorite:
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a los favoritos.
Unmark Favorite:
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de los favoritos.
Add song to Library:
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a su biblioteca.
Delete song from Library:
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de la biblioteca.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis favoritos.

Es-6

Y1203-2
SN 29401189B
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.

* 2 9 4 0 1 1 8 9 B *

Using Internet Radio

Using Internet Radio
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Note
• Available services may vary depending on the region.

Press NET.
A list of the network services appears, and the NET
indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the Ethernet
cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.

Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.

Press MENU while the Users screen is displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
You can either store a new user account, or delete
an existing one.

Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.

En-1

Using Last.fm Internet Radio ........................ 2

Using Internet Radio

Using Last.fm Internet Radio

With thousands of biographies, reviews and an endless
choice of personalised, ad-free radio stations, Last.fm is a
great way to discover music. Pick up your free Last.fm
account today at www.last.fm/join
UK and Germany only:
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-free
Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without a
computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that adapt
as your tastes change.
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of music
inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music you’ve
heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create your
account and see for yourself what it’s like to have the
world’s music at your fingertips. Latest prices and full
information are available at www.last.fm/subscribe

Profile:
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
It signs out from your account.

Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made from
the “Users” screen.

Use q/w to select menu and then press ENTER.
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User Name.
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
You can play tracks from personalized station (“Your
Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and “Your
Recommendations”).

En-2

Use q/w to select a station, and press ENTER or 1
to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen appears.
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6

■ Using scrobbling control
Use q/w to select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
*

Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.

Internetradio verwenden

Internetradio verwenden
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den
Internetradio-Menüs
Anmerkung
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.

Drücken Sie NET.
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und die
NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt, überprüfen
Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-Receiver
eingesteckt ist.

Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und
drücken Sie ENTER.
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services erscheint.

Verwendung mehrerer Konten
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten, was
bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren Logins
umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm
aus vorgenommen.

Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm des
Nutzers angezeigt wird.
Das folgende Menü erscheint:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.

Tipp
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen
Nutzerkonten zu.
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.

De-1

Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio ..... 2

Internetradio verwenden

Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio

Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre
Lieblingsmusik merkt...
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie ein
kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden darin alle
kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie die Last.fmWebsite besuchen, können Sie Ihre persönlichen Charts der von
Ihnen abgespielten Musik anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden
und sehen Sie auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.

■ Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige
1. Verwenden Sie q/w/e/r und den ENTER, um
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm
your entries“ erscheint.
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.
„Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach erscheint
die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.

Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer schier
endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten, werbefreien
Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige Gelegenheit, um
Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich Ihr kostenloses Last.fmKonto noch heute unter www.last.fm/join
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch ohne
Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-Radiosender auf
Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!
Recommended Radio:
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste Empfehlungen,
die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack verändern.
Artist Radio:
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir spielen
für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch Ihre Wahl
inspirierter Musik.
My Library:
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an einer
Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer Mitgliedschaft bei
Last.fm gehört haben.
Tag Radio:
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen Musikstil
und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie Ihr
Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es ist,
jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu können.
Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende Infos sind
unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich

Profile:
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,
„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.
Account Info:
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.
Sign Out:
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.

Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your account“
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign in to
your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der folgenden
Tastaturanzeige ein.

■ Menüsymbole
I Love this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server
gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird
erhöht.
Ban this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-Server
gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der Wiedergabe wird
verringert.
Add to My Favorites:
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste
hinzu.

Tipp
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer Konten“
nach (➔ Seite 1). Das Login kann vom „Users“Bildschirm aus erfolgen.

Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü auszuwählen
und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Search Station:
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten, Tags
oder Benutzernamen suchen.
Top Artists Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Interpreten
wiedergeben.
Top Tags Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags
wiedergeben.
Personal Station:
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich angepassten
Sender wiedergeben („Your Library“, „Your
Neighbourhood“ und „Your Recommendations“).

Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender auszuwählen
und dann drücken Sie ENTER oder 1 , um die
Wiedergabe zu starten.
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6

■ Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und dann
drücken Sie ENTER.
*

Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-Dienste
können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung eingestellt
werden.
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste eventuell
nicht verfügbar.

Y1112-1
SN 29401229
(C) Copyright 2012 Onkyo Sound & Vision Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.

* 2 9 4 0 1 2 2 9 *

Remote Control Codes

While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”
button and “Display” button.
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.

Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control
code.
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.
Notes:
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for
that component.
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until
it matches your component.
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited
to part of the component’s functionality.
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to
change by the manufacturer.

Remote Control Codes

Codes de télécommande

Códigos de control remoto

Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant
environ 3 secondes).
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».
Remarques :
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi
zone.
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.

Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3
segundos).
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.
Notas:
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione
un botón REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual está conectado el
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.

Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.
Remarques :

Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.
Notas:
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno
hasta que coincida con su componente.
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del
mando a distancia.
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.

• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande
existants.
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.

Remote Control Codes

Codici del telecomando

Fernbedienungscodes

Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.
Note:
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi
zona.
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.

Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.
Hinweise:
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet
werden.
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.

Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5
cifre.
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.
Note:

• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale
apparecchio.
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.

Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen
Herstellercode ein.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.
Hinweise:
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist
nicht garantiert.
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.

Remote Control Codes

Afstandsbedieningscodes

Fjärrstyrningskoder

Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening gaat branden.
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.
Opmerkingen:

• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska
du välja [TV/CD] när du anger dess fjärrkontrollkod.

• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi
zone-toets.
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de
afstandsbedieningscode.

Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.
Anmärkningar:

Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.
Opmerkingen:

Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODEknappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.
Anmärkningar:
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de
stämmer överens med din utrustning.
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.

• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van
uw AV-receiver.
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet
gegarandeerd.
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.
• Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.

Remote Control Codes

遙控代碼

遥控代码

在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住
[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。
在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。 例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）
按鈕和 「Display」（顯示）按鈕。
注意：

• [RECEIVER （接收机）] 和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。
• 只能为 [TV （电视）] 输入电视遥控编码。
• 除 [RECEIVER （接收机）]、[TV （电视）] 和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE （遥
控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。 但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因
此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式） 按钮。 例如，如果
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择 [TV/CD （电视 /CD）]。

• [RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。
• 您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。
• 除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE
（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。 但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按
鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。 例如，如果
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。

按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住 [DISPLAY
（显示）] （大约 3 秒钟）。
REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯亮起。
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode （遥控模
式）”按钮和 “Display （显示）”按钮。
注意：

在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈
會慢慢地閃爍一次。
注意：

在 30 秒内，使用数字按钮输入 5 位数的遥控编码。
REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯闪烁两次。
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE （遥控模式）按钮 / 遥控指示灯会
缓慢闪烁一次。
注意：
• 根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。
• 遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便
可激活相应设备的相关预设。
• 单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。
• 根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。
• 对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。
• 此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。
• 尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。

• 視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。
• 遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。 透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。
• 當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應
為止。
• 視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。
• 在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。
• 除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。
• 雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。

Remote Control Codes
Dedicated Onkyo Receiver

Cable Set Top Box

Default

62503

mio TV

02802

Toshiba

01509

Samsung

Zone 2

62506

Motorola

UPC

01582

Scientific Atlanta

01877, 01982

Zone 3

62507

01376, 00858, 01562,
01982, 01998, 02378

Verizon

02378

Shaw

01376

Moxi

02187

Videotron

01877

Suddenlink

01376, 01877

NEC

01496

Virgin Media

01068, 01060

Thomson

01582

Cable Set Top Box

Cable/PVR Combination
01877

ADB

02254, 02769

Neuf TV

03107

Visiopass

00817

Time Warner

01376, 01877, 02187

Aon

02769

Noos

00817

VTR

01376

UPC

01582

Arris

02187

NTL

01068, 01060

WideOpenWest

01877

Videotron

01877

AT&T

00858

Numericable

02767

Ziggo

VTR

01376

Bright House

01376, 01877

Ono

01068, 01562

00660, 01666, 02015,
02142, 02447, 02774

BT Vision

02294

Optus

01060

Cable & Wireless

01068

Orange

00817

Cable/PVR Combination

Cable One

01376, 01877

Pace

Arris

02187

IPTV

Cablecom

01582

01376, 01877, 01068,
01060, 01982

Bright House

01376, 01877

ADB

Cablevision

01376, 01877

Panasonic

01488, 01982

Cable One

01376, 01877

Aon

02769

Charter

01376, 01877, 02187

Philips

Cablevision

01376, 01877

AT&T

00858

Cisco

01877, 00858, 01982,
02345, 02378

00817, 01582, 02294,
02767

Charter

01376, 01877, 02187

Pioneer

01877, 01500

BT Vision

02294

Cisco

01877, 01982

01376

02657

00817, 00660, 01666,
02015, 02447

RCN

Canal+

Comcast

Rogers

01877

01376, 01877, 01982,
02187

Cisco

00858, 02345, 02378

00817

01385

01376, 01877, 01982,
02187

Sagem

Kreatel

Cox

01376, 01877

Samsung

01877, 01060, 01666,
02015, 02774

mio TV

02802

Digeo

02187

Motorola

Freebox

01482

01877, 00858, 01982,
02345

01376, 00858, 01998,
02378

Humax

02142, 03051, 03053

Neuf TV

03107

Insight

01376, 01877

Pace

02657

J:COM

03051, 03053

Scientific Atlanta

00858, 02345

Knology

01877

SFR

03107

Mediacom

01376, 01877

SingTel

01998, 02802

Motorola

01376

TeliaSonera

01385

Moxi

02187

Telus

02345

Numericable

02767

Thomson

02769

Pace

01877

Verizon

02378

Panasonic

01982

Com Hem
Comcast
Cox

01376, 01877

Daeryung

01877

Digeo

02187

DX Antenna

01500

SFR

France Telecom

00817

Shaw

Freebox

01482

SingTel

01998, 02802

Fujitsu

01497

Sony

01460

Humax

00660, 02142, 02447,
03051, 03053

Stofa
Suddenlink

01376, 01877

Insight

01376, 01877

Sumitomo

01500

J:COM

03051, 03053

Telewest

Knology

01877

TeliaSonera

01385

Kreatel

01385

Telus

02345

Macab

00817

Thomson

01582, 01982, 02769

Mediacom

01376, 01877

Time Warner

01376, 01877, 02187

Scientific Atlanta

03107
01376

02015

01068

WideOpenWest

01877

Ziggo

02142

02254, 02769

Philips

01582, 02767

IPTV/PVR Combination

Pioneer

01877

ADB

02769

Rogers

01877

Aon

02769

Remote Control Codes
IPTV/PVR Combination

AT&T

00858

Goldmund

70157

Restek

70157

BT Vision

02294

Grundig

70157

Revox

70157

Cisco

00858, 02345, 02378

Harman/Kardon

70157

Rotel

70157

Cassette Deck

Kreatel

01385

Hitachi

70032

SAE

70157

Aiwa

70157

Arcam

40076
40029

Motorola

00858, 02378

Integra

71817, 70101

Sansui

MD
Yamaha

70490

40029

Neuf TV

03107

JVC

70072

SAST

70157

Audiolab

Philips

02294

Kenwood

70626, 70157, 70036

Siemens

70157

Carver

40029
40076

Scientific Atlanta

00858

Krell

70157

Silsonic

70036

Denon

SFR

03107

Linn

70157

Simaudio

70157

Grundig

40029
40029
40070

Verizon

02378

Loewe

70157

Sonic Frontiers

70157

Harman/Kardon

Magnavox

70157

Sony

70490, 70000

Inkel

70157

JVC

40244
40070

Marantz

70626, 70029, 70157

Sylvania

Advantage

70032

Matsui

70157

TAG McLaren

70157

Kenwood

AH!

70157

MCS

70029

Tandy

70032

Magnavox

40029

Aiwa

70157

Memorex

70032

Technics

70029, 70303

Marantz

40029

Arcam

70157

Meridian

70157

Thorens

70157

Myryad

40029

Atoll Electronique

70157

Onkyo

42157

Audio Research

70157

70626

Optimus

40027

Audiolab

70157

Mission

70157

Universum

70157

Philips

40029

Audiomeca

70157

Myryad

70157

Victor

70072

Pioneer

40027

Audioton

70157

NAD

70000, 70721

Wards

70000, 70032, 70157

Polk Audio

40029

AVI

70157

Naim

70157

Yamaha

70490, 70032, 70036

Radiola

40029

Balanced Audio
Technology

70157

RCA

40027

Revox

40029

Cairn

70157

California Audio Labs 70029, 70303
Cambridge

70157

Cambridge Audio

70157

Carver

70157

CCE

70157

Cyrus

70157

Denon

70626, 70766

DKK

70000

DMX Electronics

70157

Dynaco

70157

Genexxa

70000, 70032

Micromega
Miro

70157

Thule Audio

70000

NSM

70157

Onkyo

71817

Traxdata

Zonda

70000, 70032

CD-R

Panasonic

70029, 70303

Denon

70626, 70766

Sony

40243

Philips

70626, 70157

JVC

70072

Thorens

40029

70032, 70101

Kenwood

70626

Victor

40244

Polk Audio

70157

Marantz

70626

Wards

40027, 40029

Primare

70157

Onkyo

71323

Yamaha

40097

Proton

70157

Philips

70626

QED

70157

Sony

70000

Quad

70157

Optimus

Pioneer

Sansui

40029

Accessory
Apple

81115

Jamo

82228

Quasar

70029

Radiola

70157

Onkyo

70868

Logitech

82182

70032

Sony

70490, 70000

Onkyo

82990, 81993, 82351

RCA

Remote Control Codes
Accessory
Polk Audio

82228

Video - Accessory

Satellite Set Top Box

Amstrad

00847, 01175, 01662,
01693

CGV

01413, 01567

Durabrand

01284

Chess

01334, 01626

Echostar

Ansonic

02418

CityCom

01176

00775, 00853, 01323,
01409, 02527

Clatronic

01413

Eco-Star

01413
01631

ADB

02254, 02769

Arnion

01300

Aon

02769

ASCI

01334

Clayton

01626

Edision

Apple

02615

AssCom

00853

Com Hem

01176, 01915

Elap

01413, 01567

AT&T

00858

Astro

00173, 01100

Comag

01413

Elbe

02418

BT Vision

02294

Atlanta

02418

Comsat

01413

Energy Sistem

01631, 02418

Canal+

02657

Atsat

01300

Coship

01457

Engel

01251

Cisco

00858, 02345, 02378

AtSky

01334

Crown

01284

EuroLine

01251

Kreatel

01385

Audiola

02418

01631

Europhon

01334

mio TV

02802

Aurora

00879, 00642, 01433

Cyfra+

01409

Europsat

01413, 01611

Motorola

01376, 00858, 01998,
02378

Austar

00879, 00642, 01259

00853, 02527

Expressvu

00775

Avanit

01631

D-box

00723, 01114

Fagor

01611

Neuf TV

03107

Awa

02418

Dantax

01626

Ferguson

01291

Pace

02657

Axil

01413, 01457, 02418

02418

Finlux

01626

Philips

02294

Axitronic

01626

Dgtec

01242, 01631, 02418

Fly Com

01457

Scientific Atlanta

00858, 02345

Balmet

01457

02418

FMD

01413, 01457

SFR

03107

Bell ExpressVu

00775

Dick Smith
Electronics

SingTel

01998, 02802

Belson

02418

TeliaSonera

01385

Big Sat

Telus

02345

Black Diamond

Thomson

02769

Verizon

02378

Cyfrowy Polsat

Denver

Foxtel

00879, 01176, 01356

Digi Raum Electronics 01176

Freesat

02408

01457

Digiality

01334

Fuba

00173, 01251

01284

Digifusion

01645

Galaxis

00853, 00879

Blaupunkt

00173

Digihome

01284

General Satellite

01176

Boshmann

01413, 01631

DigiLogic

01284

Globo

01251, 01334, 01626

Boston

01251

DigiQuest

01300, 01457, 01631

GOI

00775

Boxer

01458

Digisky

01457

Gold Box

00853

British Sky
Broadcasting

00847, 01175, 01662

DigitalBox

01100, 01631

Gold Vision

01631

Satellite Set Top Box

Digiwave

01631

GoldMaster

01334

BskyB

00847, 01175, 01662

@sat

01300

DirecTV

01377, 00099

Goodmans

01284, 01291

Bush

@Sky

01334

01284, 01291, 01626,
01645

Dish Network

00775

Gradiente

00099, 00887

Acoustic Solutions

01284

Canal Digital

00853, 01334

Dishpro

00775

Grandin

01626

ADB

00642, 00887, 01259

Canal Satellite

00853, 02657

DishTV

01300

Grocos

01409, 01457

Akura

01626

Canal+

00853, 02657

DRE

01176

Grundig

01284

CanalSat

00853, 02657

01237

00847, 00853, 00173,
00879, 01284, 01291

Alba

Dream Multimedia

Centrex

01457

02280, 02418

02418

01334

DSE

Haier

Allvision

00879, 00642, 01433

Hallo

01626

Receiver
Onkyo

52503

DSTV

Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box

Satellite Set Top Box

Hama

01567

Leiko

01626

Pace

Sat Industrie

01611

Hanseatic

01100

Lemon

01334

SAT+

01409

Hirschmann

00173

Lenoxx

01611

Hitachi

01284

Linsar

01284

00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356,
01423, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02059, 02060,
02211, 02657

Hornet

01300

Listo

01626

Pacific

01284

Schaub Lorenz

02418

HTS

00775

Lodos

01284

Palcom

01409, 01611

Schneider

01206, 01251

Humax

01377, 01176, 01427,
01675, 01808, 01882,
01915, 02144, 02408,
02616

Logik

01284

Panasat

00879, 01433

Schwaiger

01334, 01457, 01631

Macab

00853

Panasonic

00847, 01304, 01404,
03099

Sedea Electronique

01206, 01626

SEG

01251, 01284, 01626

ID Digital

01176

ID Sat

01334

ILLUSION sat

01631

Imperial

01195, 01334

Indovision

00887

Satplus

01100

SatyCon

01631

Manhattan

01300

Maspro

00173

Panda

00173

Servimat

01611

Matsui

00173, 01284, 01626

Pass

01567

ServiSat

01251

Maximum

01334

peeKTon

01457, 02418

Shark

01631

Mediabox

00853

Philips

Sherwood

01409

Mediacom

01206

Siemens

MediaSat

00853

00099, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00887, 00133,
02211

00173, 01334, 01626,
02418

Medion

01334, 01626

Phoenix

02418

Sigmatek

02418

Pino

01334

SKY

Pioneer

00853, 01308

PMB

01611

00099, 00847, 00887,
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754

00173

Premiere

00723

SKY Brazil

00887

01251

Pro Basic

00853

SKY Deutschland

02754

Movistar

02527, 02761

Proline

01284

SKY Italia

00853, 01693, 01850

Multichoice

00879, 00642, 01433,
02059, 02060

QNS

01404

SKY New Zealand

02211

RCA

01291

SKY PerfecTV!

02299, 02616, 03099

01251

Sky XL

01251

iNETBOX

01237

Inno Hit

01626

Innova

00099

inVion

02418

iotronic

01413

ISkyB

00887

ITT

02418

ITT Nokia

00723

Jadeworld

00642

Jaeger

01334

MySky

01356, 01693, 01850

Regal

JVC

00775

NEOTION

01334

Roadstar

00853

Sky+

01175, 01662

KabelBW

01195, 01882, 01915

Netsat

00099, 00887

Rollmaster

01413

Skymaster

Kaon

01300

Nikko

00723

Rownsonic

01567

01334, 01409, 01567,
01611

Kathrein

00173, 01561, 01567

Nokia

00853, 00723, 01223

SAB

01251, 01300, 01631

Skymax

01413

Nordmende

01611

Sagem

Kenwood

00853

MegaSat

01631

Metronic

01334, 01413, 01631,
02418

Metz
Moserbaer

01114

Koenig

01631

NPG

01631

Saivod

02418

Kreiling

01626

Onn

01284

Samsung

01377, 00853, 01175,
01206, 01458, 01662,
02986

Kreiselmeyer

00173

Optex

01413, 01611, 01626

L&S Electronic

01334

Optus

00879, 01356

Orbis

01334

Orbitech

01100, 01195

LaSAT
Lava

00173
01631

Skyplus

01175, 01334

SkySat

01100

Skyvision

01334

SM Electronic

01409

Smart

01404, 01413, 01631

Sansui

01251

SmartVision

01457

Sanyo

01626

Sony

Sat Control

01300

00847, 00853, 01558,
02299

Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box

Satellite Set Top Box

SAT/PVR Combination

Star

00887

UBC

00642

BskyB

01175, 01662

Schneider

01206

Stream System

01300

UEC

00879, 01356

Bush

01645

Sedea Electronique

01206

Strong

00853, 00879, 01284,
01300, 01409, 01626,
02418

United

01251, 01626, 02418

Canal Satellite

02657

SKY

Unitymedia

01882

Canal+

02657

01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754

Universum

00173, 01251

CanalSat

02657

SKY Deutschland

02754
01693, 01850
02211

Sunny

01300

Sunstar

00642

Supernova

00887

Supratech

01413

Systec

01334

Sytech

02418

TBoston

01251, 02418

Teac

01251

Technical

01626

Technika

01284

TechniSat

01100, 01195

Technosat

01206

Techwood

01251, 01284, 01626

TELE System

01251, 01409, 01611

Telefonica

02527, 02761

Telestar

01100, 01195, 01251,
01334, 01626

Televes

01300, 01334

Televisa

00887

Tevion

01409

Thomson

00847, 00853, 01175,
01046, 01291, 01662

Tonna

01611

Topfield

01206

Toshiba

01284

Variosat

00173

Cyfrowy Polsat

02527

SKY Italia

VEA

02418

Digifusion

01645

SKY New Zealand

01300

SKY PerfecTV!

02299, 03099
01662

Vestel

01251, 01284

DigiQuest

Viasat

01195

DirecTV

01377, 00099, 20739

Sky+

Vision

01626

Dish Network

00775

Skyplus

01175, 01334
01631

Visiosat

01413, 01457

Dishpro

00775

Smart

Vitecom

01413

Dream Multimedia

01237

Sony

02299
01300

Vivax

02418

Echostar

00775, 02527

Stream System

Volcasat

02418

Edision

01631

Strong

01300
01300

Wavelength

01413

Expressvu

00775

Sunny

Wharfedale

01284

Foxtel

01356

TechniSat

01195

Humax

01176, 01427, 01675,
01808

Technosat

01206

Telefonica

02527

02418

ID Sat

01334

Telestar

01195

Xsat

00847, 01323

iNETBOX

01237

Thomson

01175, 01662

Xtreme

01300

Kaon

01300

Topfield

01206

Yakumo

01413

Kathrein

01561

Viasat

01195

Yes

00887

Maximum

01334

Xtreme

01300

Zehnder

01251, 01334, 01413,
01631

Mediacom

01206

MegaSat

01631

Television

Zinwell

02280, 02761

Movistar

02527

A.R. Systems

10556, 10037

Multichoice

02059, 02060

Accent

10037

Satellite Set Top Box

MySky

01356, 01693, 01850

Acer

11339

@sat

NEOTION

01334

Acoustic Solutions

11037, 11667

Pace

01175, 01356, 01423,
01662, 01693, 01850,
02059, 02060, 02211,
02657

Action

10650

Wisi

00173

Worldsat

01251

Woxter

01300

Trevi

01251

SAT/PVR Combination

Triax

00853, 01251, 01291,
01413, 01611, 01626,
01631

@sat

01300

Amstrad

01175, 01662, 01693

Tricolor TV

01176

Atsat

01300

Panasonic

01304, 03099

True Visions

02408

Bell ExpressVu

00775

Philips

00099

Twinner

01611

British Sky
Broadcasting

01175, 01662

Samsung

01175, 01206, 01662

Sat Control

01300

Addison

10653

AEG

11037, 11324

Agfaphoto

12719

Aiko

10037

Aim

10037, 10499

Remote Control Codes
Television
Akai

Television
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10208,
11675

Basic Line

Akiba

10037

Akito
Akura

Alba

10037
10037

Dick Smith
Electronics

10698

Cathay

Baur

10037, 10195, 10512

CCE

10037

Digatron

10037

Beaumark

10178

11667

10037

11037

Digihome

Beijing

10208

10037

10037, 10668

10171, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11363,
11585, 11667, 11709

Centurion

Digiline

Beko

10037, 10714, 10715,
11652

Changhong

10508

Digitek

11709

11666

Digitor

10037, 10698

Clarivox

10037

Dixi

10037

Classic

10499

11363

Clatronic

10037, 10714, 11324

DMTech

12001

Clayton

11037

Domeos

10668

10037

Drean

10037

10698

DSE

10698

Contec

10037

Dual

Cosmel

10037

10037, 11037, 11585,
11667

CPTEC

10625, 11363

Durabrand

10178, 10171, 10714,
11037, 11652

Crown

10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715, 10208,
11652

Dux

10037

10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11585
11037

Allstar

10037

Anam
Anam National

10171, 10037, 11037
10037
10037, 10650

Andersson

11585

Anitech

10037

Ansonic

10037, 10668

AOC

10178, 10625, 11365

Ardem

10037, 10714

Belson

10698

Belstar

11037

Beon

10037

Berthen

10556, 10668

Bestar

10037

Bexa

12493

Black Diamond

11037

Blaupunkt

10195

Blue Sky

10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10715, 10499, 11324,
11363, 11652, 11709

Boca

Centrum

Chimei

Condor
Conrowa

DX Antenna

11817, 13817

11667

Dynatron

10037

D-Vision

10556, 10037

Dynex

12049

Daewoo

10178, 10556, 10037,
10634, 10499, 12098

e-motion

11709

E:max

11324

Dansai

10037, 10208

Easy Living

11666, 11709

Dantax

10714, 11037, 10715,
11652

ECE

10037

Elbe

10556, 10037

11652

Arena

10037

Boman

11324

Aristona

10556, 10037

Bork

11363

ART

Television

Casio

Alien
Amstrad

Television
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037

Cyberpix

11037

BPL

Art Mito

11585

Brandt

10625, 10714, 10560

Asberg

10037

Brimax

11709

Astra

10037

Brinkmann

10037, 10668

ATD

10698

Brionvega

10037

Datsura

10208

Atlantic

10037

Bush

10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10208, 11585, 11652,
11667, 12719

Electrograph

11755

Dawa

10037

Element

11886

Daytron

10037

Elfunk

11037

De Graaf

10208

ELG

10037

12140, 12209

DEC

11709

Elin

10037

Camper

10037

Decca

10037

Elite

10037

Carad

10668, 11037

Denver

10037, 11709

Emerson

Carena

10037

Desmet

10037

Carrefour

10037

Diamant

10037

10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11394,
11864, 11886

Cascade

10037

Diamond

10698

Audiosonic

10037, 10714, 10715

Audiovox

11564

Audioworld

10698

Aventura

10171

Axxon

10714

Baird

10208

Bang & Olufsen

10565

Barco

10556

Byd:sign

10037, 10208

Envision

11365, 11506

Epson

11379

Remote Control Codes
Television

Television

Erres

10037

Genesis

10037

ESA

10171

Genexxa

10037

ESC

10037

GFM

10171, 11864, 11886

Euroman

10037

Godrej

11585

Europa

10037

Goldfunk

10668

Europhon

10037

GoldStar

Evesham

11248, 11667

10178, 10037, 10714,
10715

Excello

11037

Exquisit

10037

Ferguson

10037, 10625, 10560,
10195, 11037, 11585

Fidelity

10171, 10037, 10512

Finlandia

10208

Finlux

10556, 10037, 10714,
10715, 11248, 11667

Firstline

10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10208,
11363

Fisher

10208

Flint

10037

Formenti

10037

Fraba

10037

Friac

10037, 10499

Fujicom

11709

Fujitsu

10809

Fujitsu Siemens

10809, 11248, 11666

Funai

10171, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11394, 11666,
11817, 13817

G-Hanz

11363

Gaba

11037

Galaxi

10037

Galaxis

10037

Gateway

11755

GE
GEC

10178, 11454, 10625,
10560
10037

Goodmans

Hisense

ITV

10037

JGC

11709

10150, 10178, 10037,
10634, 11037, 10508,
10499, 10578, 11576,
11585, 11643, 11667,
11691, 12433

Jinfeng

10208

Jubilee

10556

Hitachi Fujian

10150

JVC

Hitec

10698

10650, 10653, 10508,
11428, 11601, 12271

Hoeher

10714

Kaisui

10037

Karcher

10714, 11324
10556

Hitachi

10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10560, 10668,
10634, 11037, 10499,
11585, 11667

Television
10556, 10508, 10208,
11363, 12098

Hornyphon

Jinxing

10556, 10037, 10698

JMB

10556, 10634, 10499

Gorenje

11585

Hugoson

11666

Kathrein

Gradiente

10037

Humax

11295

Kendo

10037, 11037, 11585

10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715

Kennex

11037

Kioto

10556

Hyundai

11037, 10698

Kiton

10037, 10668

Iberia

10037

KLL

10037

Graetz
Granada
Grandin

Hypson

10714
10037, 10560, 10208
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715,
11652

ICE

10037

Kneissel

10556, 10037, 10499

Grundig

10556, 10037, 10195,
11223, 11667, 12625

iLo

11394

Koenig

10037

Imperial

10037

Kolin

GVA

11363, 12098

Indiana

10037

10150, 10037, 11610,
11755

H&B

12001

Ingelen

10714

Kolster

10037

Haier

10037, 10698, 10508

Inno Hit

11037, 11585

Konka

10037, 10714

Hallmark

10178

Innova

10037

Korpel

10037

Hankook

10178

Insignia

10037

Hanseatic

10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10634, 10499,
12001

10171, 11423, 11564,
12049

Kosmos
Kunlun

10208

Integra

11807, 13100, 13500

L&S Electronic

10714

Interbuy

10037

Lavic

11363

Interfunk

10037, 10512

Lavis

11037

Internal

10556

Lecson

10037

Intervision

10037

Lenco

10037, 11037

Irradio

10037

Leyco

10037

IRT

10698

Isukai

10037

10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10698,
11423, 11768, 11840,
12182, 12358, 12424,
12834

Liesenkoetter

10037

Hantarex

10037

Hantor

10037

Harwood

10037

Hauppauge

10037

11324

HCM

10037

Highline

10037

Hinari

10037, 10208

Hisawa

10714

ITS

10037

ITT

10208

ITT Nokia

10208

Remote Control Codes
Television
Lifetec

Television
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 12001

Linsar

11585

Local India TV

10208

Local Malaysia TV

10698

Lodos

11037

Loewe

10037, 10512, 11884

Logik

11037, 10698

Logix

10668

Luma

11037

Lumatron

10037, 10668

Lumenio

10037

Lux May

10037

Luxor

11037, 10208

LXI

10178

M Electronic

10037, 10714, 10634,
10195, 10512, 11652

Madison

10037

Magnavox

10171, 11454, 11365,
11506, 11755, 11867,
12372

Medion

Television
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10512, 11248, 11585,
11667, 12001, 12719

Television

Naiko

10037

Onix

10698

Nakimura

10037

Onkyo

11807, 13100, 13500

National

10508, 10208

Onn

11667, 11709

NEC

10178, 10653, 10508,
10499

Onyx

11709

Opera

10037, 10714

Neckermann

10556, 10037

Optimus

10650

NEI

10037, 11037

Orbit

10037

NEO

11324

Orion

Netsat

10037

10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 12001

NetTV

11755

Orline

10037

Neufunk

10556, 10037, 10714

Ormond

10668, 11037

New Tech

10556, 10037

Osaki

10556, 10037

Newave

10178

Osio

10037

Nikkai

10037

Osume

10037

11614

Nikkei

10714

Otto Versand

Mikomi

11037, 11585

Nikko

10178

10556, 10037, 10195,
10512

Minato

10037

Nokia

10208

Pacific

Minerva

10195, 11248

Norcent

11365

10556, 10714, 11037,
11324

Ministry Of Sound

11667

Nordmende

Palladium

10556, 10037, 10714

Minoka

10037

10037, 10714, 10560,
10195, 11585, 11667,
12001

Megatron

10178

MEI

11037

Memorex

10150, 10178, 11037

Mercury

10037

Mermaid

10037

Metronic

10625

Metz

10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 11533

MGA

10150, 10178

Micromaxx
Microspot

10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11324, 12001

Magnum

10037, 10714, 10715

Mirai

11666

Manesth

10037

Mitsubishi

10150, 11250, 10178,
10556, 10037, 11037,
10512, 11171

Novatronic

10037

Mivar

10609

Novita

11585

Moree

10037

Nu-Tec

10698

Morgan's

10037

O.K.Line

11037, 11324

Moserbaer

11585

Oceanic

10208

MTC

10512

Odys

12719

MTlogic

10714

Okano

10037

Mudan

10208

OKI

11585, 11667

10037, 10668, 11037

Olevia

11610, 12124

Manhattan

10037, 10668, 11037

Marantz

11454, 10556, 10037

Mark

10037, 10714, 10715

Master's

10499

Mastro

10698

Masuda

10037

Matsui

10556, 10037, 10714,
10195, 11037, 10208,
11666, 11667

Normerel

10037

Nortek

10668

Matsushita

10650

Multitec

Maxent

11755

Multitech

10037

Omni

10698

Maxess

12493

Myrica

11666

Onei

11667

Meck

10698

Myryad

10556

Onida

10653

10556, 10037

NAD

10178, 10037

Onimax

10714

Mediator

Palsonic

10037, 10698

Panama

10037

Panasonic

11480, 10037, 10650,
10508, 10208, 11636,
12170

Panavision

10037

Panda

10698, 10508, 10208

Pansonic

11636

Penney

10178

Perdio

10037

Perfekt

10037

Petters

10037

Philco

10178, 10171, 10037,
11394

Philips

10178, 10171, 11454,
10556, 10037, 10512,
10605, 10690, 11394,
11506, 11867, 12372

Phocus

10714, 11652

Remote Control Codes
Television

Television

Phoenix

10037

Reflex

10037, 10668, 11037

Sei-Sinudyne

10037

SunBriteTV

11610

Phonola

10556, 10037

Relisys

11585

Serie Dorada

10178

Sungoo

11248

Pioneer

10037, 10698, 10512,
11457, 11636, 12171

Remotec

10171, 10037

Shanghai

10208

Sunny

10037

Reoc

10714

Sharp

Sunstar

10037

Plantron

10037

Revox

10037

10650, 10818, 11165,
11423, 11659

Sunstech

12001

Playsonic

10037, 10714, 10715,
11652

RFT

10037

Shintoshi

10037

Sunwood

10037

Roadstar

10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715

Shivaki

10178, 10037

Supersonic

10208

Siam

10037

SuperTech

10556, 10037

Powerpoint

10037, 10698

Prinston

11037, 10715

Rolson

12001, 12098

Siemens

10037, 10195

Profitronic

10037

Supra

10178

Rowa

10037, 10698

Siera

10556, 10037

Proline

10037, 10625, 10634,
11037

Svasa

10208

Saba

10625, 10714, 10560

Silva

10037

Swisstec

11614, 11775

Sagem

10618

Silva Schneider

10037

Sylvania

Saivod

10037, 10668, 11037

Silver

10715

10171, 11394, 11864,
11886

Salora

10208, 12001

SilverCrest

11037

Symphonic

10171, 11394

Sampo

10178, 10171, 10650,
11755

Sinudyne

10037

Synco

10178, 11755

SKY

10037, 11614, 11775

Syntax

11610

Samsung

10178, 10556, 10037,
10618, 10650, 10208,
12051

Skyworth

10037, 10698

Sysline

10037

Sliding

11324

Tacico

10178

SLX

10668

Talent

10178

Solavox

10037

Tashiko

10650

Prosonic

10037, 10714, 10668,
11324, 11585, 11667,
11709, 12001

Protech

10037, 10668, 11037

Proton

10178

ProVision

10556, 10037, 10714,
11324

Pvision

12001

Pye

10556, 10037

Qingdao

10208

Quasar

10650

Quelle

10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10512

R-Line

10037

Radiola

10556, 10037

Radiomarelli

10037

RadioShack

10178, 10037

Radiotone

10037, 10668, 11037

RCA

10178, 11454, 10625,
10560, 10618, 11781,
12247, 12403, 12429,
12434, 12746, 12932

Realistic

10178

Recor

10037

Rectiligne

10037

Redstar

10037

Sansui

10171, 10037, 10714,
11248, 12001
11037, 10508, 10208,
11142, 11365, 11585,
11667, 11974

Soniko

10037

Tatung

10037, 11248, 11324

Soniq

12493

TCL

Sonitron

10208

10698, 12403, 12429,
12434, 13183

SBR

10556, 10037

Sonneclair

10037

TCM

10714, 12001

Schaub Lorenz

10714, 11324, 11363,
11667, 12001

Sonoko

10037

Teac

Schneider

10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037

Sonolor

10208

Sontec

10037

10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10698, 10512, 11248,
11363, 11709, 11755

Sony

10810, 11505, 11167,
11651, 11825

Tec

10037

Tech Line

10037, 10668

Technica

11037

Sanyo

Schoentech

11037

Scotch

10178

Scott

10178

Sears

10178, 10171

Seaway

10634

Seelver

11037

SEG

10037, 10668, 11037,
12719

SEI

10037

Soundesign

10178

Soundwave

10037, 11037, 10715

Sowa

10178

Squareview

10171

Standard

10037, 11037, 11709

Starlite

10037

Strato

10037

Technics

10556, 10650

Technika

11667

TechniSat

10556

Technisson

10714, 11652

Techno

11585

Remote Control Codes
Television
Technosonic
Techvision

Television
10556, 10625, 10499,
11324

Television

VCR

Toyoda

11709

11365, 12098

Humax

TRANS-continents

10556, 10037, 10668,
11037

Walker

11667

Panasonic

20614, 20616

Waltham

10037, 10668, 11037

Philips

20739

10037, 10698, 10512,
11363

Wansa

12098

ReplayTV

20614, 20616

Wards

10178

Sonic Blue

20614, 20616

Watson

10037, 10714, 10668,
11037

Sony

20636

TiVo

20636, 20739

11709

Techwood

11037, 11667

Tecnimagen

10556

Teco

10178, 10653

Triad

10556

Tedelex

10208, 11709

Trio

11248

Teknika

10150

Triumph

10556, 10037

Wega

TELE System

11585

TVTEXT 95

10556

Welltech

10714, 11652

PVR

Telecor

10037

Uher

10037

Weltstar

11037

DirecTV

20739

Telefunken

10037, 10625, 10714,
10560, 10698, 11585,
11667

Ultravox

10037

Westinghouse

11755

Go Video

20614

UMC

11614, 11775

Wharfedale

20739

10037

10556, 10037, 11324,
11667

Humax

Unic Line

10037

Panasonic

20614, 20616

Uniden

12122

White Westinghouse

10037

Telegazi

10037

Philips

20739

United

10556

10037

10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 10715, 11652

Wilson

Telemeister

ReplayTV

20614, 20616

Windsor

10668, 11037

Telesonic

10037

Unitek

11709

Sonic Blue

20614, 20616

Windy Sam

10556

Telestar

10556, 10037

Universal

10037, 10714

Sony

20636

Wintel

10714

Teletech

10037, 10668, 11037

Universum

10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10618, 10512

TiVo

20636, 20739

World-of-Vision

12001

Wyse

11365

TV/VCR Combination

Xenius

10634

Amstrad

10171

Xiahua

10698

Ferguson

10625

XLogic

10698

Fidelity

10171

Xrypton

10037

GoldStar

10037

Yamaha

10650, 11576

Grundig

10556, 10037, 10195

Yamishi

10037

10178

Yokan

10037

Mitsubishi

10556

Yoko

10037

Philips

10556, 10037

YU-MA-TU

10037

Radiola

10556

Zenith

10178, 10037, 11365,
11423, 12358

Saba

10625

Sanyo

11974

Zepto

11585

Schneider

10556, 10037

Zonda

10698

Sharp

10818

Telefusion

Transonic

20739

Teleview

10037

Tennessee

10037

Univox

10037

Tensai

10037, 11037, 10715

V7 Videoseven

11666, 11755

Tesla

10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 11652

Vestel

10037, 10668, 11037,
11585, 11667

10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11248,
11585, 11667

Vexa

Tevion

10037

Victor

10650, 10653, 11428

Videocon

10037, 10508

Thomson

10037, 10625, 10560

Thorn

10037, 10499, 10512

Vidtech

10178

Thorn-Ferguson

10499

Viewsonic

11365, 11564, 11755,
12049

VideoSystem

10037

TMK

10178

Tokai

10037, 10668, 11037

Vision

10037

Tokaido

11037

Vistron

11363

Topline

10668, 11037

Vivax

11709

Toshiba

10195, 11037, 10618,
10650, 10508, 11169,
11508, 11524, 11652,
12203

Vizio

11758, 12209

Vortec

10037

Voxson

10178, 10037

10037

VCR

DirecTV

20739

Go Video

20614

Siemens

10037

Sony

11505

Teac

10178, 10171

Remote Control Codes
TV/VCR Combination

DVD

Technics

10556

Dantax

30539, 30713

Harman/Kardon

30582, 31229, 33228

Maxim

30713

Thomson

10625

Denon

30490, 30634, 31634,
32258, 32748

Henss

30713

MDS

30713

Hitachi

30573, 30713, 31664

Medion

30630, 30741

31152

Hoeher

30713

Memorex

32213

3D LAB

30539

Dick Smith
Electronics

Metz

30571, 30713

30675

30713

31152

Accurian

Digihome

HotMedia

Micromedia

30503, 30539

30713

30646

Acoustic Solutions

DigiLogic

Humax

30713

Micromega

30539

30675

31394

Inno Hit

AEG

Digix Media

30675

30522, 32083

31152

30741, 30675, 32428,
32596

Microsoft

AFK

Disney

Insignia

30533

30675, 31152

30713

Aiwa

DSE

Minax

30503, 30571, 30627,
31612, 31634, 32147

30713

30675

30713

Mitsubishi

Akai

Dual

Alba

30539, 30713

Durabrand

30675, 30713

Irradio

30646

Ambiance

33052

Dynex

32596

JVC

Amstrad

30713

Dyon

33052

Anthem

32820

eBench

31152

30503, 30539, 30623,
30867, 31597, 31602,
32855

Aristona

30539, 30646

Elfunk

30713

ASDA

32213

Elite

31152

Audix

30713

Emerson

30675, 32213

Autovox

30713

EuroLine

30675

Awa

32587

Ferguson

30713

Basic Line

30713

Finlux

30741

Bel Canto Design

31571

Firstline

30713

Black Diamond

30713

Foehn & Hirsch

33052

Blue Parade

30571

Funai

30675

Blue Sky

30713

30522

Brandt

30503

GFM

30675

Bush

30713

Global Sphere

31152

C-Tech

31152

Go Video

30741

DVD

Integra

DVD

Kendo

30713

Kennex

30713

Kenwood

30490, 30534

Lenco

30713, 33052

Lexicon
LG

32545
30741, 31602

Limit

33052

Lodos

30713

Loewe

30539, 30741, 32474,
32783

Logik

30713

Lumatron

30741, 30713

Momitsu

33052

NAD

30741

NEC

30741, 31602

Onkyo

30503, 30627, 31612,
32147, 30571, 31634

Oppo

30575, 32545

Orion

30713

Ormond

30713

Pacific

30713

Palladium

30713

Panasonic

30503, 30490, 31579,
31641, 32523, 32710,
32859

Pelican Accessories

30533

Philco

30675

Philips

30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31340,
31354, 32056, 32084,
32434, 32689

Lunatron

30741

Luxman

30573

Luxor

30713

Pioneer

Magnavox

30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31354

30571, 30142, 30631,
31571, 32442, 32860

Polk Audio

30539

30713

Presidian

30675

Marantz

30539, 32414, 32432,
33444

ProAudio

31394

California Audio Labs 30490

GoldStar

30741

Cambridge Audio

32808

Goodmans

30713, 31152

Centrum

30675, 30713

GPX

30741

30627

Grandin

30713

Cinetec

30713

Grundig

30539, 30713

Clatronic

30675

H&B

30713

Proscan

30522

Clayton

30713

Haaz

31152

Mark

30713

Proson

30713

Crown

30713

Hanseatic

30741

Matsui

30713

Pye

30539, 30646

Changhong

Manhattan

Remote Control Codes
DVD

DVD

Radionette

30741

Sylvania

30630, 30675

Radiotone

30713

Symphonic

30675

RCA

30522, 30571, 32213,
32587

Tamashi

31394

Tandberg

30713

REC

30490

Targa

30741

Red

32213

Tchibo

30741

Redstar

31394

TCL

32587

TCM

30741

Roadstar

30713

Rotel

30623

Salora

30741

Samsung

30490, 30573, 30199,
30820, 31635, 32069,
32329, 32489, 33195

Sanyo

30713

Schneider

30539, 30646, 30713

Schoentech

30713

Scott

31394

SEG

30713

Semp
Sharp

30571, 30741, 30675,
31394
30713

Technics

30490

Techwood

30713

Teletech

30713

33052

Anthem

32820

Cambridge Audio

32808

Denon

32258, 32748

Dyon

33052

Foehn & Hirsch

33052

Funai

30675

Harman/Kardon

33228

Insignia

30675, 32428, 32596

Integra

32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501

30522

Toshiba

30503, 31639, 32277,
32551, 32705, 33157

30503

Transonic

31394

30630, 30675, 30713,
32250, 32474, 32652,
32869

TVE

30713

United

30675, 30713, 31152

Universum

30741, 30713

Urban Concepts

30503

Vestel

30713

Victor

31597

Vizio

32563

Vtrek

32587

Waltham

30713

Wellington

30713

Weltstar

30713

Oppo

30741, 33052

Silva Schneider

30741

SilverCrest

31152
30539, 30713

SM Electronic

31152

Smart

30713
30533, 30864, 31033,
31070, 31431, 31516,
31633, 32180

30503, 30741

Ambiance

Thomson

30533

Blu-ray Disc
30490, 30539, 30646,
30817, 31354, 32298,
32299

Blu-ray Disc

30571

Shinsonic

Sony

Technica

Zenith

Theta Digital

Sherwood

Skantic

Teac

Yamaha

Sony

31516, 32180

Sylvania

30675

Toshiba

32551, 32705, 33157

Vizio

32563

Yamaha

32298, 32299

DVD-R
Accurian

30675

Aristona

30646

Denon

30490

Emerson

30675

Funai

30675

Go Video

30741

GPX

30741

Hitachi

31664

Humax

30646

Irradio

30646

32855

JVC

31597

Lenco

33052

30741

Lexicon

32545

Loewe

30741

30741, 31602

Magnavox

30646, 30675

Limit

33052

Medion

30741

Loewe

32474, 32783

Panasonic

Magnavox

30675

30490, 31579, 32523,
32710, 32859

Marantz

32414, 32432, 33444

Philips

30646, 31340

JVC

Momitsu
Onkyo

33052
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501

Pioneer

30631, 32860

Pye

30646

RCA

30522

Samsung

30490, 31635

32545

Schneider

30646

Wharfedale

30713

Panasonic

31641, 32523, 32859

Sharp

30630, 30675, 32869

30713

Windsor

30713

Philips

32084, 32434, 32689

Sony

Star Clusters

31152

Windy Sam

30573

Pioneer

30142, 32442

31033, 31070, 31431,
31516, 31633, 32180

Strato

31152

Xbox

30522, 32083

Samsung

30199, 33195

Sylvania

30675

Strong

30713

XLogic

31152

Sharp

32250, 32474, 32652

Targa

30741

Supervision

31152

Sherwood

33052

Toshiba

31639, 32277, 32551

Soundwave

Remote Control Codes
DVD-R

TV/DVD Combination

Victor

31597

Magnavox

Yamaha

30646

Matsui

11037, 30713

Zenith

30741

Medion

12719

Nordmende

12001

Odys

12719

HD-DVD

12372

Integra

32901, 33104 33504

Panasonic

12170

30741

Philips

Microsoft

32083

11454, 10556, 11394,
30539
10698

Onkyo

32901, 33104 33504

Powerpoint

Xbox

32083

Prosonic

12001

Pvision

12001

TV/DVD Combination

RCA

12746, 12932

Akai

11675

Schaub Lorenz

12001

Black Diamond

11037, 30713

SEG

11037, 12719, 30713

Blue Sky

11037, 30713

Sharp

10818

Bush

11037, 10698, 12719,
30713

Soniq

12493

Sunstech

12001

Centrum

11037, 30713

Sylvania

Crown

11037, 30713

10171, 11394, 11864,
11886, 30630, 30675
10698

DMTech

12001

Teac

Dual

11037, 30713

Technica

11037, 30713

Dynex

12049

Telefunken

10698

Elfunk

11037, 30713

Teletech

11037, 30713

Emerson

11394, 11864, 11886,
30675

Thomson

10625

Toshiba

11524

Ferguson

11037, 30713

Goodmans

11037, 30713

Grandin

30713

Grundig

30539

H&B

12001

Hanseatic

12001

Hitachi

11037, 11667, 30713

Insignia

12049

JVC

12271

11423

Logik

11037, 30713

Luxor

11037, 30713

United

11037, 30713

Universum

30713

Vestel

11037

Viewsonic

12049

Weltstar

11037, 30713

Remote Control Codes

Memo

* 2 9 4 0 1 0 9 4 *

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2012:03:09 16:46:52+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2012:03:09 16:46:52+09:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Metadata Date                   : 2012:03:09 16:46:52+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:72cfcd8b-4f73-481f-b12e-eb30368d02dc
Instance ID                     : uuid:3d09c3f7-6d66-49de-a5c5-f40f373cb02a
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 156

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Onkyo Av Receiver Tx Nr818 Users Manual

Onkyo-Tx-Nr818-Owner-S-Manual onkyo-tx-nr818-owner-s-manual

AV Receiver TX-NR818 Manual_TX-NR818_English

TX-NR818 to the manual c3a2c9fb-6e65-4708-8261-f42e3b644448

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation